Qrammar of
BY
C. K. BELL, 0.2UI.G., CLE.
LATB OF INDIAN CIVIL SBBVICE, LATB POLITICAL OFPICBE IN 8IKKIM.
SECOND EDITION.
" It is only from its roots in the livinsr generation
of men that language can be reinforced with fresh
vigour for its seed. What may be called a literate
dialect grows ever more and more pedantic and
foreign till it becomes at last as unfitting a vehicle
for living thought as Monkish Latin."
Jambs Russell Lowell.
Nt7h: MAF fK
MA p ^(?0M
The Bengai, Secretariat Book Depot, Writers' Buii^dings.
1919.
Price Rs. 3.
?L ''3
i'l/
€afcu«a :
Baptist Mission Prbss, 41, toif«ft Circuiar Road.
1919. ' "
PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION.
In tlie first edition this grammar was published as the first
part of a " Manual of Colloquial Tibetan," tbe second part con-
sisting of an Euglish-Tibetan Colloquial Dictionary. In this
second edition both parts liavenot only been revised, but have also
been considerably enlarged. The map accompanying this edition
— the latest from the Indian Survey Department — is bulkier
than the Royal Geographical Society's map of 1904, with which
the first edition was furnished. It has therefore been found best
to bring out the Grammar and Dictionary as separate books.
The map accompanies the Grammar.
2. The Tibetan words have been romanized throughout the
Grammar, for the convenience of those who lack either the time
or the inclination to master the Tibetan character. Many
additions have been made, especially in the Chapters on the Verb
and in the Conversational Exercises, which latter number thirty-
two as against eighteen in the first edition.
3. As Political Officer in Sikkim I was in charge of the diplo-
matic relations of the British Government with Tibet and Bhutan
also. Much material for framing rules and illustrations has
therefore been gleaned from my Tibetan friends of all classes, High
Priests, Cabinet Ministers, civil and military officers, shop-keepers,
mule-drivers, peasants, etc., etc., during my fifteen years' service
in Tibet and on the borderland. Among all these my thanks are
especially due to Rai Sahib Kusho Pahlese of the noble family of
Pahla in Lhasa. And Mr. David Macdonald, British Trade
Agent at Yatung, Tibet, has again rendered valuable assist-
ance.
4. In addition to the grammars formerly consulted 1 have
examined Mr. Hannah's careful work, which was not published
until some years after my first edition had seen the light. My
acknowledgments are also due to the Government of Bengal,
m93()54
IV PREFACE.
who have defrayed the cost of this edition also in return for the
copyright which I have made over to them.
5. This Grammar has been adopted as one of the text-books
in the High Proficiency examination in the Tibetan language,
held under the auspices of the Government of India.
6. In conclusion I must express my pleasure at finding that a
second edition was called for owing to the first edition being
sold out, — a rare occurrence among books on Tibet, — for it may
be hoped that some have found it useful.
Daejeeling : .
November, 1919.
PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION OF "MANUAL OF
COLLOQUIAL TIBETAN."
1. The object of this little work is to provide a practical hand-
l)ook for those who wish to acquire a speedy knowledge of Collo-
quial Tibetan. It, therefore, does not deal with the written lan-
guage, which differs widely fi-om the colloquial, and is useless for
conversational purposes.
2. Notwithstanding the political and commercial importance of
Tibet it is remarkable that so few Europeans are able to converse
with the people in their own tongue. The language is undoubted-
ly a hard one to acquire on account of the complexity of the
grammar, the intricacy of the spelling, the fine shades of pro-
nunciation, the different terminology, known as the honorific,
employed in addressing the higher classes, the variety of dialects,
and the distinction, already noted, between the literary and spoken
language. To minimise these difficulties and to make the ap-
proach to the colloquial as easy as possible, is the aim of this
handbook. It seeks to do so by giving a minimum of grammati-
cal notes, fully explained by examples, a clear statement of the
rules of pronunciation, a simple system of phonetic spelling in the
Roman character, a set of conversational exercises and a suffi-
ciently full vocabulary of both common and honorific words to
meet the ordinary requirements of conversation with all classes.
3. Tibet is essentially a country of dialects. A well-known
proverb says —
" Every district its own dialect ;
Every lama his own doctrine."
Under these circumstances it was necessary to select the
dialect most widely spoken, and that of Lhasa has been chosen
VI PREFACE.
accordingly. It is not only the dialect of the Central Province^
but maybe said to be also the lingua franca of the whole of Tibet.
It is more generally spoken than any other, and is recognized as
the most correct form of speech by all.
4. The Vocabulary contains somewhat less than ten thousand
Tibetan words, the number of separate English words being some
seven thousand or about twice as many as those contained in any
colloquial Tibetan vocabulary up to date. The remaining three
thousand words are made up of about two thousand honorific
words and one thousand extra Tibetan words. Where two or
more Tibetan words are given for one English equivalent, all are
in common colloquial use and the one placed first is the com*
monest. It is hoped that the honorific words given may be found
useful. Existing vocabularies give but few. A knowledge of
honorific words is essential for talking to or of Tibetans of good
position. It is hoped also that the exercises in Tibetan hand-
writing given in Part I, Chapter XVII, may assist any student,
w^ho so desires, to learn how to write Tibetan letters and other
documents in a clear and correct style.
5. It is recommended that the grammar be used as follows :
The rules of each Chapter should be perused and their accom-
panying examples learnt by heart. The Words at the end of the
Chapter should then be committed to memory as far as possible,
and the exercise (for reading and copying) should be read aloud
to the teacher to ensure correct pronunciation, and every word
should be understood. After this the other Exercise (for ti-ansla-
tion) should be translated viva voce and then written down, care
being taken, when writing, to verify the spelling, as very few
Tibetan teachers can spell correctly. On the following day the
Tibetan half of the reading exercise should be covered up, and the
English half re-translated into Tibetan, first viva voce and then in
writing. If the above plan is followed the student will gain the
soundest possible knowledge of the language. But if the student
has not time for the above thorough system, he should omit the
writino* of both exercises and limit himself to the viva voce.
PREFACE. VU
6. As regards teachers it is best to obtain at first one who
speaks English. If the teacher can speak the Lhasa language
also, so much the better, but very few of the English-speaking
Tibetans in the Darjeeling district or in Sikkim are really pro-
ficient in the latter. As soon as he can converse a little, the
student should change to a Lhasa man that speaks Tibetan only,
so as to be certain of always speaking in Tibetan. "When the
teacher knows English or Hindustani there is always a tendency
for the conversation to drop into the latter languages. The Lhasa
teacher should of course be as well educated a man as is procur-
able. The student should also, when he is able to understand and
converse a little, call in Tibetans of the Lhasa province to talk to
him, one at a time, changing them every two or three weeks.
Tibetans are generally ready to talk ; they have not the formal
constraint of manner which characterizes so many of the Indian
races. The more he calls in thus, the better will he be able to
understand and reply to any chance Tibetan he meets.
7. A word as to the system of romanization. In this, which is
believed to be as phonetic as possible, I had reluctantly to differ
from the various systems of my predecessors, as none of them
seemed to me to reproduce the sounds in the dialect of Lhasa,
though some reproduced those in the Sikkimese and other
dialects. The system followed in this book is nearly the same as
that recommended to Government for official reports, etc., by
Captain O'Connor, CLE., Trade Agent at Gyangtse, and the
author, but distinguishes the different sounds with greater accu-
racy than was considered necessary in the Government system.
8. The Tibetan words and syllables in brackets are those used
in the simple form of book-language. Where the pronunciation
of the literary and spoken form of a word is the same, the literary
form alone is given, since the sole object of entering the spoken
form is to show the exact pronunciation of the word.
9. In conclusion, I must acknowledge my obligations to the
Government of Bengal for their patronage, to the Grammars of the^
Kev. Graham Sandberg, the Rev. H. A. Jiischke and the Rev.
Vlll PKEPACE.
Father A. Desgodins, and especially to Mr. Henderson's Tibetan
Manual, which marks a great advance in the Tibetan colloquial
over any of its predecessors. And most of all are my thanks due
to Mr. David Macdonald, who has revised this book throughout,
and to whose unrivalled knowledge of both colloquial and literary
Tibetan are largely due whatever merits the work may possess.
Chumbi, Tibet: C.A.BELL.
March, 190.5.
CONTENTS.
Chapter
Page
I I.
The Alphabet and its Pronunciation
1
TI.
The Indefinite and Definite Articles
2.3
III.
The Noun
28
IV.
The Adjective
36
V.
The Auxiliary Verb
42
VI.
The Verb
51
VII.
The Verb continued
67
VIII.
Numerals
78
IX.
Pronouns
93
X.
Adverbs
108
XL
Postpositions, Conjunctions and Interjec-
tions
lU
XII.
The Order of Words in a Sentence
123
XIIL
The Honorific Language
125
XIV.
Miscellaneous ; Monetary System, Weights
and Measures, Divisions of Time, Years,
Seasons, Dates, Days of the Week and
the Time of Day
136
XV.
A Conversation Translated, Transhterated
and Paraphrased
146
XVI.
Conversational Exercises —
1. General conversation
151
2. The same continued
153
3. Talk with servants
155
4. The same continued
157
5. Food
159
6. Time of the day, days of the week,
dates, seasons, etc.
161
7. The same continued
163
CONTENTS.
8. The weather
9. Conversation with the teacher, hon.
10. Relatives
11. On the march ...
12. The same continued
13. The same continued
14. Crossing a river
15. Talking to persons on the road
16. General enquiries by an interpreter in
the field
J 7. The same continued
18. Buying supplies for troops
19. The same continued
20. The same continued
21. Buying meat in the bazaar
22. Buying a turquoise
23. Buying silk
24. A small trader calls at a gentleman'
house with some wares
25. Deciding a dispute
26. Paying a visit ...
27. The same continued
28. Receiving a visit from a Tibetan offi
cial
29. The same continued
30. The same continued
31. A visit to the Dalai Lama by a Tibetan
General
32. Diplomatic intercourse, hon
Chapter XVII. Exercises in Tibetan handwriting
ABBREVIATIONS.
Adj. = adjective.
Adv.= adverb.
Art. = article.
Ch.= Chinese.
Conj.= conjunction.
C.T.= Central Tibet, i.e. the
provinces of U and
Tsang.
Def.= definite.
Do.= ditto.
E.G.= for instance.
F.= female, ferainina.
Hin. = Hindi.
Hon.= honorific.
H. hon. = high honorific.
Imp. = imperative.
Inf.= inferior.
Inter j.= interjection.
Interr. = interrogative.
Lit.= literally.
M.= male, masculine.
Mon.= Mongolian.
Neg.= negative.
0pp. = opposed.
Post.= postposition.
Pron. = pronoun.
Rel. = relative.
S. = substantive,
Sik.= Sikkimese.
Sup.= superior.
Ts. = Tsang province.
V.I. = verb intransitive.
V.T. = verb transitive.
W.= with.
ERRATA.
Page 104, line 21, for te-ring-sang read fe-ring-sang ,
„ 133
21 ,
^ ^-^r
V
^•^c-
., 167
9 .
, dra-taJc-po
}}
dra-taJl-po.
,, 179
12 ,
' '^^'r-
)}
C^qj-q"-
„ 196
23 ,
• l^'^'
}}
^^•q'
„ 198
18 ,
S3
}}
f=T^-
„ 211
6 ,
, hle-sa
}}
hla-sa.
„ 224
2 ,
, ton-min
))
ton-min.
GRAMMAR OF
COLLOQUIAl. TIBETAN,.
Note. — Where the colloquial and the literary form differ the latter
is given in brackets in the Tibetan character. In the romanized
Tibetan the colloquial forms alone are given.
CHAPTER I.
The Alphabet and its Pkonunciation.
1» The Tibetan Alphabet was originally taken from the
Sanskrit Devanagari in the 7th century A.D., but many of the
letters, especially in Central Tibet, now represent sounds differ-
ent from their prototypes. Both the Sanskrit and the Tibetan
pronunciations have changed considerably during this period.
2. The Tibetan letters are as follow : —
Consonants and their romanized equivalents.
Surds.
Aspirates.
Sonants,
Nasals.
Gutturals T[' ha
P' kha
q]- lia
C nga
Palatals ^' cha
^' chha
R' cUa
J nya
Dentals ^ ta
^' tha
^- ta
(3j' na
Labials Zy ya
S^' pha
q- pa
^' ma
Sibilants ^' tsa
(5^* tsha
^' tsa
Semi-vowels 01' wa
(S' sKa
3' sa
n- (not roman-
'^ ized
y^- ya
^' ra
q' la
sPr sha
^' sa
^' ha
^' a
^ TIBETAN GEAMMAE.
3. Id this Chapter I erdeavour to give as nearly as possible-
the sound represented by each Tibetan letter. The romaniza-
tion throu£:hout is intended only as a rough guide to the pro-
nuncx^tion for those «rho arc unable to give the time for study-
ing the exact pronunciation. The consonants when used as
initials, i.e., when immediately preceding the vowel of a syl-
lable, are pronounced as below.
T|' The k in the Hindustani word kam. To be pronounced
K with the tongue between the teetb and without breath-
ing.
P* an aspirated k, e.g., hlock-head, pronounced in one breath.
jfiA The same as the aspirated k in Hindustani words, e.g.,
khana.
^^ also a k but pronounced through the throat and in a
lower tone-than
T
C like the ng in coming. Say coming iny eliminating the^
^ f first four letters comi.
•5' ch, in chin. To be pronounced with the tongue between
the teeth and without breathing.
cB' ch aspirated, e.g., touch-hands pronounced in one breath,
i.e., like the aspirated ch in Hindustani,
g' is also a ch pronounced through the throat and in a
~ •^ lower tone than ^'
V as the initial sound in nuisance.
y^y
CHAPTER I.
^l' a Dental t to be pronounced with the tongue between the
'^ teeth and without breathing. This ^' and di' differ
from the English t and n, in that the English letters
require the tongue to be placed against the roof of the
mouth and so have a heavier sound.
S' aspirated t, e.g., thora in Hindustani; or — subject to the
It J\ difference noted under C — 'pat hard pronounced in one
breath. Not to be confused with the English th sound,
in words like the.
^ is like ^^" but pronounced through the throat and in a
lower tone than ^
<5" is like the English n, e.g., in nest subject to the difference
noted under c^•
Z\' like English p as in pear, to be pronounced with the
tongue between the teeth and without breathing.
SJ' aspirated _p, e.g., stop here pronounced as one word.
f Not to be confused withj^/i sound occurring in English
words like phantasy ^ etc.
q* is also a p but pronounced through the throat and in a
p lower tone than 2:]' If it forms the second. syllable of
a word whose first syllable ends with a vowel or with
C;'Q'^" or O]' it is pronounced as w*
4 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
S^' as English m, e.g., in man,
7. -
^' ts is pronounced like weights eliminating the letters weigh,
^ ^ To be pronounced with the tongue between the teeth
and without breathing.
^' as ts aspirated, e.g., in pats hard pronounced as one word.
^' is also a ts, but pronounced through the throat and in a
"^ '^ lower tone than ^'
nr like w in English, e.g., in wing.
(S)' Something like sh in English, but pronounced in a
lower tone and more through the throat.
5' Something like s in English, but pronounced in a lower
"^ tone and more through the throat.
Q' has no pronunciation of its own. When it precedes
qi'^-r-q' or ^'» these letters are pronounced respec-
tively like g in gun^j in jam, d in den^ h in hend, and
ds in 'pads. See also para. 23.
Us}' like y in English, e.g., in yacht.
y ' . .
X^' is short like r in English, e,g., in rat. It is never rolled.
V
Of like I in English, e.g., in linger.
I
.n' like sh in English, but pronounced sharply and through
i the teeth.
CHAPTER I.
^' like s in English, but pronounced sharply and through
the teeth.
^' like h aspirated in English, e.g., in hand.
A
t^' When a vowel is initial, either I^' or Q^' is used as its
base. The difference in pronunciation of these two is
that the throat is opened for t^' and kept closed for
Cr The result is that 15^' carries the ordinary vowel
sound, whatever the vowel may be ; while Q^ in the
case of or ^^ gives a slight, but very slight sound
of ic ; e.g., O^^" noise = something between ur and wur
though more like ur.
a
4. The five vowels are called ^^^^'fg' Yang-nga : U^'
i u e o
l^' \sx # ^i
CV >o "N -V— '
The four vowel-signs are i u e o .
Every consonant implies a following a, unless another vowel
is attached. This a is»sounded like the English u in rub.
cv named ^I'CTI" Hi-liu, like i in in or tin, e.g., ^' man = mi.
named (ej^^'H]' sKap-kyu, like oo in root when intial or
final. Like u in pull, when medial, e.^., nfT boat =
€ru ; M' west = nup.
6 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
^ named C12T[C^ Deng-bu, like e in men. But when final
also often like i in tin, e.g., (^(3J'^' to take = lem-pa ;
gf'^^l' key ==i di-mi.
•^ named (5J'^' na-ro, like o in hole ; e.g., fi|27|'CI' to come
back = loH-fa,
5. The Tibetan letters with the four vowel-signs are as
follow : —
Tvr ki.
P' klnu.
$1' Ice.
"^^j 7^^ow.
^' chi
^ cKhu
i' cHe
^(3j| nyow.
y ti
iq- thu.
^' fe.
<3j^ J nor.
q- pi.
g- ^ifiu.
q* _pe.
SJ^I mo.
^' tsi.
^ tshii.
1* ^^'e.
Soj 1 2vbl.
(3' sKi.
i' s^*.
0^-6.
CM^I i/o.
^' ri.
(^' lu.
^' 57ie.
^Jt'l song.
S' /le.
3
^1 Om.
(The 0 is named ^^ /e-
kovy^ and represents the letter ^ ^
The above set of examples is that ordinarily used in
Tibetan schools and monasteries.
6. Final Consonants* — The preceding paragraph shows
the ordinary pronunciation of the vowels which is, however j
further affected by some of the final consonants. Of final con-
CHAPTER I.
sonants there are only ten ; that is to say, though any conso-
nant may begin a syllable only one of these ten consonants may
end it. These ten final consonants are as follow : —
cn'E^'5:'(3J'^'3^'Q'^'llJ'^' Let us briefly consider the pronun-
ciation of each as a final, and its effect upon the pro-
nunciation of the preceding vowel.
^1' is pronounced so slightly as hardly to be heard and short-
ens the preceding vowel. When followed, however, by
another consonant in a second syllable of the same
word it is clearly pronounced, and does not affect the
pronunciation of the preceding vowel, thus ^^V eye
^mi, but Q5J^"i^' to hit = 'pholc-pa.
C is pronounced more sharply than when aninitial. It does
not affect the pronunciation of the preceding vowel,
e.g., ^C nsime==ming, but sounded sharply. The
sound of final ^1 and C^' can be obtained from the
teacher with but little practice.
g-' '^ These all modify the sounds of the preceding vowels a, ii
^ I and 0 ; i.e., a into e (in French les); u into il (in French
^' [> sur)', 0 into o {e.g., h'dren in German or eu in French
-,, I pen). Thesemodifiedsounds will, therefore, be roman-
J ized into e, o, u respectively.
The final consonant itself is not pronounced; e.gf., {^^'
manure = Zit, ^0^' wool = _pe, g^'CJ' to fiee = tro-pa.
^' makes the preceding vowel short; Of and 25^'
^•
8 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
make it long, thus f^s:' manure = Zw (short u); but
(^^' body == lii (long u).
6r modifies vowels as ^Oy and ^' modify them, but is
itself pronounced, e.g., O^gr answer = len. When
followed by q'2<}'i^' or ^i^' in the same word it is pro-
nounced as m, e.g., ^(S'^'cB' precious = rim-po-chhe.
~1 Do not affect the pronunciation of the vowel, and are
^ themselves pronounced the same as when initial, e.g.,
^' J> ^R' delegate = is/ia_p, SJ^'JII' bridge = *am-_pa, ^^'
corner = S'M/. But ^' like ^l* is sometimes pro-
nounced so lightly as hardly to be heard.
Q' is not itself pronounced but lengthens the sound of the
vowels preceding it. No vowel except the indirect a
precedes it, e.g., (9;^'^pQ^' sky = nam-khd.
7. Affix* — The letter ^' also occcurs as a second final
consonant or affix after either of the four letters ^]"C^'^'
It is not pronounced, but in the case of Rl' preceded by a,
it has the effect of lengthening the a, e.g., Ojcn^'^'
jGS=ld'Si. It is sometimes written in an incomplete form
below the final consonant thus (l|zn'|^'
CHAPTER I.
9
8. Sanskrit Letters* — The following six letters taken
from the Sanskrit are occasionally used in the Colloquial
language, namely : —
3J'
tra thra dra na kha khya.
^' is known as ta-lo-tra, which means '^ ta reversed is tra" ;
j6* as 7ia-lo-na, ^' na reversed is na" -, and so on.
9. Examples.
[The student is recommended to cover the romanized Tibetan letters
with a piece of paper and thus to test his knowledge of the alphabet
and its pronunciation.]
TI'CJ' leather = ko-wa.
g^' encampment = gar.
^ C^' tree = shmg .
^' water = chhu,
t^'^' mother = a~ma,
Q^" light, s. = d.
5:J(3j' profit =p/ien.
^(3j'^' to ride = sKom-pa.
^" earth = sa,
3'^' to eat = sa-wa,
^^•q- faith = t'e-pa.
fi^C and = fa?i^.
t^^'^Tj' work = le-ka.
O^^V sheep = lit.
aj^'C]' hand = Za^'-^a.
^' CJ' lord = cKo-ivo,
10. Diphthongs* — There are no real diphthongs, but
under this head may be classed the combination ai, oi, ui,
occurring when the one syllable of a word ends in a, o, or w,
10 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
and the next begins with i ; e.g., ^' and d' of the corpse ==
rO'i, pronounced almost like r6\ but with a slight sound of i ;
similarly p and d * of the mouth = Jcha-l and almost = hJie ;
n and d' of the son =pu-i and almost =_p'i^. In fact the d'
modifies the preceding vowels in practically the same way as
^' would do.
The other combinations of vowels are ao, ioy uo, eo, ooj au, iu,
eu; e.g., aQ^j ^Q^i :^a^| Sa^] "fS^| ^^j 3^1 ^1^1
They are not often used in the colloquial and are not really
diphthongs, as each vowel is clearly though rapidly pro-
nounced.
Note that Q" and not t^' is always used as the base of
the second vowel ; that is, the letter over which the
second vowel must be written ; e.g., p and Q^* and not
p- and t^'
11. Compound Consonants. — These are of two kinds,
namely Subjoined and Superadded. These subjoined con-
sonants are : —
(Jl'y^'^'fl^* and ^' They are known respectively as J}'^^'
wa-sur, '' tea on the edge " ; W^'i^'^^^' ya-ta, '' ya sub-
joined'^ ;^'q!rq|^- ra-ta, '' m subjoined" ; 0\'^^^\^*
Za-^a "Za subjoined''; and ^'qt^^j^' Tia-ta ''ha sub-
joined.''
CHAPTER I. 11
12. Wasuf s. — Wasur may be joined to sixteen consonantsy
VIZ. :-
T n '^' ^' f T T ^' ^' ^' ^' ^' ^' •^' ^' ')'
< < < <<<<<<<<<
The effect on tlie pronunciation is to lengthen the sound
of the vowel in the same way as final Q* but not quite so
much, e.g. J ^' salt= tshd.
<
13. Of yatas there are seven, which are joined to the, fol-
lowing letters, thus —
nr %a, ra" khyaj g' Jcya, g' cha, g' chha, g' cKa, g' nya.
Note the pronunciation of the last four.
Thus 2]C^'^' liard == Hyong-'po.
g<3i'^' to go = chhim-pa.
q' bird = c^a.
14. Rata is joined to thirteen consonants, namely : —
^' tra, 5' ^'^'^^
CI' pronounced tra, or ^^a, 3' ^^'^'^^ 9' pi'<^'
nounced fra, pa or 7'a.
Note that gutturals and labials take the sound of dentals.
Rata is also joined to (^' na, ^' ma, ^' sha, ^J' ^^ ^^
Note. — Several English grammars also give ^' ihra, but this is
neither given in Tibetan primers nor used in the co lloquial language.
12 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
tra or hra, ^' hra, e.g., ig^j' blood = thra, ^\' boat = tru,
^jOJ'^ bell = tri'pu, ^^'q* (^5'^' ) ^o write = t'ri-pa, 5J^'
son = se, gr^' bridle = trap .
Note that where any of the first nine ratas are followed by'
the vowels or the r is pronounced less strongly
than when followed by the other vowels. And in no
case is the r pronounced as strongly as in English.
15. Hata in the colloquial language is not used except with
0^' e.g. J g* a god=7iZa, the h being pronounced before the
I. It is also joined to cn'^'^'^' and ?' and is then written
9'5'3'^' and ^' respectively, but these last five cases only
occur in transcribing Sanskrit words, and are of little use for
colloquial purposes.
16. La-ta is joined to six consonants, thus —
a!'al'S'fl'(§'S' '^^®^® ^^^ ^^^ sounded as la in a high tone,
except B' which is pronounced da, e.g., 9]' song = lu ; B'l^'
month = da-wa.
17. Examples.
^^V rock = tra.
S!'^" reed-pen = nyu-gu.
^'TISTI' basket = le-ko.
^(^^•gq' my bridle = nge-trap.
CHAPTER I. 13
B^'3'5f^' your life = Jchyo-ltyi so.
P ^'SI' -^^^ song = A:/io ?tf.
(Sq^'n* dance = sKajp-ro.
gc;'p^' chest (of hodiy)=pang-lho.
^C'Cini^l' lane = hrang-ga.
18. Superscribed Consonants* — There are three of
these, namely, ^0\' and ^' They are placed on the tops of
other letters. \ 3
^' is placed on the top of twelve consonants, thus :
-Ti- ^- £• r f T ^ f ^' ^' ^' r a^
A;a gfa 92gfa /a nya ta da na ha ma tsa dza.
Note that the ^' is written as • except with ^' when the
full ^' is written. Note also that 2S' is pronounced
as ga, g* as /a, ^ as da, S' as ha and g' as c^za. The
others differ from the ordinary TI'C^' etc., in that they
are pronounced in higher tone.
19. Examples*
TfrC^'^' foot = kang-fa, ^^'^' old man == ge-'po, *(3J' orna-
ment = gf7/en, f' stone = cZo, 5*^' sharp = 710-2^0, g"^'
root = ^5a-i(;a, (^qj-g- shepherd^ Zw^'-(^22. The ^' itself is
14 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
not pronounced except sometimes when occurring in the
second syllables o£ words ; e.g., ^'g' sacred thunder -bolt =
dor-je. When ^' surmounts a consonant as above, it is named
;^'5^cn' rang-go, i.e., ra-head, and the consonant is said to be
"tied on" or ^' subjoined^' as the ya-tas, ratas, etc., above.
Thus rh' is named ra-ka-ta^ i.e., ra with ka subjoined, ^' is
named ra-ga-ta, and so on.
20. 0^' similarly named (a|'51^' lang-go, i.e., la-head, is
superadded to ten consonants as follow : —
^. oj- ^. ^. |- ^- gj- aj. r^- ^.
g' is pronounced Ida. The rest are pronounced in the same
way as the corresponding consonants with superadded
^ I (^' and ^' are pronounced in a high tone as cha
and fa respectively.
21. 5^' similarly named ^'^^' sang-go, i.e., sa-head, is
superadded to eleven consonants as follow : —
^ % w ^' %' ^' f s- g- 1}- f
These are pronounced in the same way as the correspond-
ing consonants with superadded ^' or 0\' The consonants
surmounted by P^' or ^' are similarly said to be " tied on,''
e.g., SI' is named la-nga-taj and ^' is named sa-da-ta.
CHAPTER I. 15
22. Examples,
Qj* five =nga.
5J'^' morning = nga-t'ro.
wm^' iron = cha.
gm'I^' to soar (in the air) = ding-wa.
^cn'i^* sin = dUc-fa.
g<3i' medicine = men.
23. Prefixed Letters.--?The five letters ZTl'^'q'S^'Q^' are
found in many words before the initial consonant. These
prefixes are not themselves pronounced, but affect the pro-
nunciation in the same way as superadded ^'0^' or ^'
^^' occurs before ^•^•t^'2:-aj'^'(S-3'C;v]-^'^'
^' before ^'cnT^'^'S^'
q- before ^•^'^'|'|'y^-^'^-r(^-3'§-^-^-
^' before p'CI]'C:'c5*Ry^'^'<3j',3g'E-
Q^- before p'J=T|-^-5'^-^-:^'q-(3g'^'
Examples.
cn^^' one = chi.
^K^' bolster = c^ew
CT|^5;,'q' new = sa-2?a.
^^Q^' silver = ngfi^.
16 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
q^C'^' to send = tang-wa. R^^' seven = dun
5lip;^-Hf skilful = A'/ie-2?o.
[pa,
Q^S^'CJ' to assemble = dzom-
n9
24. Confusion might arise in the case of one of the pre-
fixed letters making a word with one of the final consonants,
the vowel being the inherent a, e.g., ^qi' as to whether ifc
represents ta or gd. The confusion is obviated as follows. If
it is the initial ^', the word is written ^^V ta. If it is the
prefix, Q^' is added thus, R^O^' = gd-
25. When 2^' as initial consonant follows ^' as prefix,
the combination is either sounded as w or not sounded at all.
If accompanied by a yata or a vowel sign, it is not sounded
at all ; e.g., R^^^' breath=it, ^gC^' tune, melody=2/a?i^ ;
Cqcn*^' to throw = yu^-pci' If accompanied by rata, it fol-
lows the ordinary rule of ratas (para. 14) and prefixed ^
(para. 23) and is pronounced dr. In other cases it is pro-
nounced as w, e.g., ^^C power, authorit j =^ wang.
26. Sentences for Pronunciation.
Bring some hot water. cB'cS'^'Qyl^^'-A^' chhu tsha-po khe sho.
This water is not hot. ^'Q^^'cS'^T^^'Q^^^' c/i/itt di tsha-po
min-du.
It is cold. ^C^'S^'-^^' trang-mo re.
You can go now. C'aqi'^cn'cn'^C' ta dro chhoJc-M-rs;
CHAPTER I. 17
27. Irregular Sounds, — In the following cases the pro-
nunciation is modified for the sake of euphony.
(a) m and n sounds. — When one syllable is followed by
another beginning with a prefixed letter the sound of m or n
is often introduced. This occurs especially when the first
syllable ends in 271' e.g,
g^'gj' key, hon, = chhan-di.
gcn'Qg' grain, hon. =chha7i-dru.
^'Q.^cn' is not = mm-du.
5k*^3Qi' clothes, hon. = nam-sa.
(h) Reduplicated Sou7ids, — When the following final conso-
nants, or affixes, namely, ^'^j^'C^'C^^''^' andO]' are followed
by CJ' or i^' the sound of the final consonant is reduplicated,
e.g. q^q]' (a^qjq|^') q'qja^Q'q' to hinder, hon. = ka^-]ca
nang-wa; ^\^Q^'ZJ'^^^ he said, hon. ==sung-nga-re. ^^'q"
STjc^C^'q' to take care of, hon. == nyar-ra nang-wa ; "^aj'q' fat
= tshil-lu; S|^'q^'^<5jC;'q'5;c I the official has given, ^6m-
po nang-nga-re.
(c) q' following a vowel or 0\'. When q* follows a vowel
its sound is sometimes omitted altogether, e.g., '3'^' goitre
= ha-a.
2
Ig TIBETAN GKAMMAR.
rn'q' pillar = ka-a.
q* after 0^' is often pronounced as r, e.g., —
^q'q'CI]3iC;'CI' to conquer, \\on. = gye-ra nang-wa.
{d) Other changed sounds
q(S^'S^' spoon =Mp-thu.
^\'X^' ( ^]R' ) sweet buck-wheat = gyap-ra.
(e) There are also other irregular sounds, but it seems un-
necessary to enumerate them all here. They will be picked
up more easily in the course of conversation.
28. The Tones. — In Tibetan the tone, that is to say
the pitch of the voice, varies, each word in this language
having a tone in which it should be pronounced. It is very
important for the student to render these tones with sub-
stantial accuracy; otherwise the pronunciation becomes un-
certain and many of his words will assume meanings which
he does not intend for them.
29. For practical purposes we must discriminate between
three tones, viz. the high, the medium, ; id the low. The
initial letter and the prefix govern the tone.
High Tone. — Use this in a word beginning with a prefix
except when the initial letter is p'^'t^B'S'^'^'^^'-^'f^S' oi' £'
Use it also with any of the following initials, viz. ^''S'^'^'
Medium Tone. — Use this in a word beginning with
TO'(3&'9'^'(^' as initials whether with or without prefixes.
CHAPTER I. 19
Low Tone. — Use this in a word beginning- with any of
the following letters as initials 2T]'C;*5'^'^'<5'^'5^'^'aj'(ej'3'ysJ'
^'O^'Q' also in words in which a prefix precedes the initials
2T]'^*^*^' or ^' Such initials are in this case^ as previously
noted in paragraph 23, pronounced as ^,y, d, h and dzj res-
pectively. For effect of ^'C^'^'^'fl]'^' in lengthening or
shortening the preceding vowel see above paras. 6 and 7.
Examples.
T^'^' leather = A;o-^!;a, high tone.
^!^' in cense =po, high tone and lengthened.
Z^cn' brick = fa, high tone and shortened.
c&5^'^' cold (in the head) = chham-pu, medium tone.
^i^^* opportunity = i/ia^, medium tone.
i^STl'CJ' rope = thalc-pa, medium tone and shortened.
0^' to (postposition) la, low tone.
C^cn^' yes (a polite affirmative) = Id, low tone and lengthened.
^^' Tibet =^0, low tone and shortened.
Note the difference in above examples between 5}^' and
^^' and between O]' and fl^^l^^'
20 TIBETAN GRAMMAK.
30. Punctuation* — It will have been noticed from the
examples that at the end of each syllable a dot is placed at the
top right-hand corner. This dot is named (^cn ^6'Ae. A comma,
semi-colon or colon is indicated by a vertical line ( ! ) called
she, a full-stop by a double line ( J| ) called nyi-she, and the
end of a chapter by four lines (|[ IT ) called sKi-she. In
hand-writing a mark ( ^ ) is usually placed between each
syllable instead of the tshe, but is sometimes incorporated
with the last letter of the syllable.
31. Spelling* — The Tibetan method of spelling words
should be acquired, as the teacher in common with all Tibet-
ans will use it.
32. Pronounce the first consonant or compound consonant,
add the vowel and pronounce the two together.
Thus, nV • Ixa-na-ro, ko. ^' • sa-Jca-ta, ka, ka Hi-liu, ki.
It is as if to say sa with ka-ta makes ka, ka with Hi-liu makes
ki.
33. If there is a final consonant, pronounce the whole
word with it, then the consonant itself, and then the whole
word again. T\\Vi^,Tnz^ . ka-na-To,ko,kong-nga-kong. Again
T]C^'. ka ya-ta, kya, kya-na-ro, kyo, kyong-nga, kyong.
34. If the vowel is the inherent a, pronounce the first
consonant, then the whole word, then the final consonant,
and then the whole word again, e.g. ^\\Z,'' ' ka, kang-nga,
kang. ^' • sa-ga-ta, ga, gang-nga, gang, f^^ . la-ta-ta,
ta, ta-na-ro, to, tok-ka-sa, tok.
CHAPTER I. 21
35. When a prefixed letter begins tlie syllable, e.g. ^V^:
otc,_, it is pronounced as ]ca-wo, t'a-wo ; e.g. ^*^(3J • Jca-ivo-nya-
deng-hu, nye, nyen-na, nyen. R^^ ; fa-wo-ga, gap-pa (jap.
This wo is pronounced very shortly.
36. A syllable containing only a consonant and the in-
herent a, e.g., 5^' is called rna-hyang, i.e. " only ma" to dis-
tinguish it from the consonant accompanied by one of the
other vowels. Thus, to enquire whether a syllable is ^' or ^'^
you may say " Is it sa-na-ro or sa-kyang ? "
36. Examples.
flJC handle, la sKap-kyu, lu, lung-nga, lung.
^^54' cotton, ra, re-sa, re.
^f^C^*^' to send, pa-wo-ta-tang-nga, tang; tea : tang-wa.
Q^gC'^^J* to embrace, a-wo-kha-ya-ta khya, khya shap-hyu,
khyuy khyii-fa, khyil} pa: khyii-pa.
K^y enemy, td-ivo-ga-ra-ta, dra.
g' spirit, la-ha-ta, hla.
^^^'<3j^^' good fortune, pa-wo-sa-na-ro, so, so-t'a, so ; na,
nam-ma-sa, nam : s6-nam.
(oj* j]' hat. sKa-wa-sur, sKa ; ma na-ro, mo : sKa-mo.
^^'cB' book. Td-wo-pa-deng-bu, pe ; chha : pe-chha.
3]^' lightning, ka-la-ta, la, la-na-ro, lo, lo-ka, lo.
22 TIBETAN GRAMMAF.
^cn'^I' to run. ra-ga-ta, ga, ga ya-ta gya, gya sKap-kyu, gyu^
gyulz-lia, gyuH ; fa: gyulc-pa.
^^^'^^]K lineage. ra-M-liu, ri, ri-Jca-sa, riU ; ]5a-tvo-ra-ga'
ta, ga, 9<^ ya-ta, gya, gya-sKaj5-kyu, gyu, gyu-fa, gyu r
riH-gyu.
37. Sentences.
Where are you going to ? p^'^j'q'Q^'^'CTI'y^aj'q' khyo Ha-] a
dro-Hi yim-fa ?
I am going to Darjiling,, Sir. qci|^rC;T|'^C:'(a^'a^^§j'^^<3^'
Id nga Dor-je-ling la dro-Hi yin.
What have you got in the bundle ? '^'^^•(3jC;'q'Z7|'^*'c^^'q'
dolc-thre nang-la Jca-re yo-pa ?
Different kinds of things, Sir. aicr|^'<^'qcr|'|l'^qj^'5r:^- Id
cha-ld na-tsho yd.
Have you a tea-pot among them? ^P^'(3jC;'^'P RC^'Sfis'q^'
te-'i nang-la kho ting yd- ft ?
Yes, Sir, I have. aiqj^'C^:^- Id-yo.
What is its price ? s^C^'^'cB^'^^t^^'i^' Hong Jca-tsho yim-fa ?
Twenty rupees. f^^^'^^'5^'^'»fl'g3^'C]'y^(3j' Id gor-mo nyi-
shu tham-pa yin.
AVill you let me have it for fifteen rupees ? gl^'^'^^'^^W
2T|^C^'^]'UsJ(3J'^^' gor-mo che nga la tong-Hi yim-pe ?
No, Sir. fll2=n^'^(3j* la-men.
Well, good-day ! f^'<^*^'^'^^' o-na Ica-le gyu.
Good-day, Sir ! ^'Q^'(^'2:n'^'Q^(5;^'ft'^(3JC^' ta o-na Ha-le chhip-
gyn-nang. ^
CHAPTER 11.
The Article.
7. The Indefinite Article.
1. This is the same as the numeral one without the prefix
^V namely ^^' chi.
2. The final ^V is very slightly pronounced (see above
Cap. I, para. 6).
3. It is placed after the noun or adjective, which it quali-
fies ; thus, ^'^^1' mi- chi , a man.
4. It also takes any case-inflection instead of its noun or
adjective, which latter in such case are not inflected. The
method of case-inflection will be dealt with later under the
chapter relating to nouns.
5. ^^\' is often omitted where we should use ^' a " or '^an '*
in English. If there might otherwise he doubt as to whether
more than one is meant use ^cn'
6. In the case of weights and measures or in other cases
where something full is implied, ^\n' Hang is used instead of
■S^l' e.g. Sif^'CJ'^C" phor-pa fcang, a bowl-full.
Words.
Man= ?!' mi.
Woman=^^'Sv^(3I' kyi-
men.
Dog = g- khyi
Cat = ^'^' sKi
mi.
24
•rJEETAN GRAMMAR.
Please give = ^]5;c:'X'^^'
CRi^kQ' nang-ro-nang.
Rupee = ^^'^' gor-mo.
To me= C'QJ' nga-la.
And = ^C^' fang.
Noise = ^^'A;e.
Pleasant = ^^'^' kiji-fo.
Is = ^^' re.
Wood = ^C shing.
Armful = qt'^'^lC pang-
pa Jcang.
He = ra^ kho.
Do not make (of noise) = 3^'
^q- ma-gyap. To him = pq- kho la.
Country ==ajC^'CJ'/rm^-^a. I Tibetan = ^^'Cj' ^o-j9a.
Note that the verb comes at the end of the sentence.
Exercise No. 1. (For reading and copying).
A man = ^]' sen? mi-chi.
A woman = ^^'^^(^'^^ ] kyi-men chi.
A dog and a cat= ra*6Cn'^C^'(Sj'^*S2n I khyi chi fang sKi-mi
chi.
Please give me a dog. (Lit. To me a dog please give) C^'O^'
R*^^'^^C'^^^'<3\C I nga-la khyi chi nang-ro-nang.
Please give him a rupee [^a|'^^'^'S^|'q|(3:c;'X^^'^<5;c;' |
kho-la gor-mo chi nang-ro-nang.
Do not make a noise ^^'^T'^q | ke ma-gyap.
CHAPTER II. 25
It is a pleasant country. {Lit. country pleasant is) QJC^'
gs^-'Hf^^l lung -pa kyi-po re.
Please give me an armful of wood. {Lit. To me wood an
armful please give). raj'^C'qC'q'CTICCrit^^C:'^^^'
^(3jC I nga-la shing pang pa Hang nang-ro nang.
He is a Tibetan. p'CJ^'^''^^ ] kho po-pa re.
Exercise No. 2. i^For translation).
A dog. A man and a dog. A woman and a cat. Please
give me a rupee. Please give him a cat.
II. The Definite Article.
7. As in the case of the indefinite article, so also in that
of the definite article the in English is often left unexpressed
in Tibetan. Where expressed^ Q.^' di, this and ^* fe, that are
used, though these represent demonstrative pronouns rather
than the definite article. It follows therefore that Q.^' or
s:* should not be used unless the in the sentence really repre-
sents this or THAT*
8. Where the refers to a noun previously mentioned, ^"
is used.
9. As in the case of ^cn' so also both QJ\' and K' are
placed after the noun or adjective which they qualify and
take the case-inflection instead of the noun or adjective.
20 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
10. The particles TI'p' and ^V have the sense of the when
placed after immerals. Thus ^^^'T[' nyi-ka, the two, both ;
q2:,g:'P' dun-kha, the SE7EN. The ^'p'^' ka, klia, ka, take the
case-inflection similarly to QJ\' di.
Who = ^' su.
NO
Good = ysJZTl'CI' yaU'fo.
Bhutanese = ^9^'^' drul-
WORDS.
Wind = <gcn^'q' hlalc-pa.
Strong (of wind) =(^*C]' tsha-
pa.
po.
Bring = Q^ra^'^a^^• khe-sho.
Food = p'fSJ^l' kha-la.
Exercise No. 3.
The dog and the cat. p'a^'5:c;'(^'^'Q^^ | khyi di tang sKi-
mi di.
Who is the man ? (Lit. The man who is ?) The man {i.e.,
the man just mentioned) is a Tibetan. g^'Q.^'^'^5: |
mi di su re ; S^^'^'q^'CJ'-^^ J mi t'e pb-pa re.
The boy is good. ^'^iTI'Q.^'ys]^'^''^^ ! pu-gu di yaJc-po re.
Who is the boy ? The boy is a Bhutanese. g*qi'C;^^'^'5,^ J
pu-gu di su re ; n'qi'^'agzTI'CJ*'^^ | pu-gu t'e drulc-pa
re.
CHAPTER II. 27
The wind is strong, g^^'^'c^'^*'^^ ] Mak-fa tsha-po re.
Bring the wood (or some wood). ehc^'Qir^'^cn! shing
khe-sho.
Bring the food. ra•a^^^•C;^[g^•^JC|q^ ] kha-la l-he-sho.
Exercise No. 4.
The man. The man is a Bhutanese. Please give me wood.
Lit. (To me the wood please give.) The wind is good.
CHAPTER III.
The Noun.
1. Abstract Nouns thoagli used in the literary language
are frequently avoided in the colloquial by the phrase being
turned and an adjective employed instead of the abstract
noun. Thus, the cleverness of this doctor is known to all,
T^S^'S'O^^'^P^'^'^^'^'g^C'p^'^^'^'^^ I am-chhi di khe-
po yim-pa gang-khe shing-Hi-re . Lit. ^3^^'^'nm-ch.hi, doctor,
Q^Zs' di, this, ^p^'q* khe-po, clever, y^(3;'C|' yim-pa, that
HE IS, §2C^'P^' gang-khe, ALL, ^^*!I]*'^S I shing-Ki-re, know.
When expressed 0^^' Id is generally added to the adjectival
root; e.(/. ^'Hj^' c/iAe-Zo, GREATNESS ; S^'q^' ?>om-Zo, thick-
ness. Certain abstract nouns are formed by joining together
two contradictory words, thus, size = ^'^Z^'chhe-chhung, lit.
LARGE— SMALL ; TEMPERATURE =,^'q]C* tsha-traiig, lit. hot
COLD ; QUALITY r=^B^'Z,3i' Sang -ngeii, lit. GOOD — bad. Thus,
WHAT IS THE SIZE OF THAT HOUSE ? pC^'^'S'(5&'§C^'^*^5^*'^^ I
khang-pa t'e chhe-chhung kan dre re, lit. pC^' khang-pa,
HOUSE, 5- fe, THAT, ^'^C:' chhe-chhung ,siZE, ^'^'^^' kan-dre,
OF WHAT KIND, ^^' re, IS.
CHAPTER III. 29^
2. Nouns denoting membership of a certain country,
religion, profession, etc., are formed by adding q-q^q-q^?;]'
or ^' pa, fo, pa, po, ma or mo, to the name of the country, re-
ligion, etc., concerned. Thus, Bhutanese = aqOTq* druJc-
ya; cakpenter = ^Cq3'^' shing so-ica ; inhabitant of
Chumbi Valley (Tromo) = ^J'^'q* tro-mo-wa ; servant =
qjL^qj'q' yoU-fo; chief = ZT|5' q* tso-wo ; ^' and ^ when
used in this connection sometimes denote the feminine gender,
e.g. gq-q" gft/e-po = KiNCx, gOI'if ^2/e-wo = QUEEN. But, as
noted below (para. 6), femininesare often denoted by one of the
participles q'q'q' or q*^ thus, this woman is a Tibetan^
^^'^^^^k'Q^^'q^'q''^^ I l^yi-men di pd'fare. q' and q' are
used instead of q' and q* respectively when the preceding
syllable ends in a vowel.
3. Nouns denoting the agent are usually formed by
adding ^p(3J' lihen to the root of the verb, e.g. ysJC^'q* yong-
iva, TO COME, ysJC^'^p(3J' yong-khen, the person who comes.
This termination ^TR3\' corresponds to the termination icala
in Hindustani, e.^. aiie-wala. More rarely 5^' wi is used.
4. Diminutives* — These are not only formed by the addi-
tion of the words gC.' chhung, or (=SCcBC^' chhung -chhiing ,
30 TIBETAN GKAMMAJl.
SM ALL^ to the noun, but in some cases also by tlie terminations
Q, I 2T|' or g^' u, Jcu, or thru, e.g. M* di-u, small stone
from ?' do, stone ; R'^' p^f^-gu, boy from R' pu, son ;
g'acn' clia/p-thru, chicken from fl' cKa, fowl. With the
diminutive in Q^' tlie inherent a and the vowel o are changed
into e ; e.q. ^' as above becomes 5^' If the noun ends in
^V this is sometimes cut off and with ^ forms the diminutive,
e.g. 0^^y In, sheep_, (^'^\' lu-lcu, lamb.
5. Gender, — Rules as to gender are but loosely observed
in colloquial Tibetan. In names of animals^ trees, etc., the
genders can be distinguished by the particles 2^' pho, for mas- -*
culine and ^' mo, for feminine. These precede the root of
the noun, e.g., Z^'-PiUi' 'pho-shing, male tree, ^'^^C,' mo-shing^
FEMALE TREE. They are also used by themselves as nouns ; e.g.
5;^' 3^' pho-mo, MALES and FEMALES.
6. In a limited number of words i^'^I'Kj'^' denote the
masculine and ^'3^' the feminine, the particles in such cases
following the noun, e.g. ^^'Zi\' se-iJo=soii, ^J^*^' se-mo =
DAUGHTER. But in numcrous cases these six particles are used
without denoting gender at all: e.g., 5,'^' la-ma, priest;
CHAPTER III. 31
y^' wa-mo, POX, botli male and female; ^^'^5^(3J'Q^^'^'?r
R'^K I hyi-men di fro-mo-iva re, this woman is an inhabi-
tant OF THE Chumbi Vallky, ^^'^q' fro-mo-wa, being used
both for male and female.
7. Declension, — The declension is simple, and is effected
as in Hindustani by means of postpositions. Thus the
accusative is the same as the nominative, the genitive takes
^}^' or when the noun ends in a vowel more usually Q' the
dative 0^' the agentive q]^' or when the noun ends in a
vowel more usually ^" and the ablative 5j^ | It will thus be
seen that nouns ending in a consonant are declined somewhat
differently from those ending in a vowel. One example of
each is therefore given : —
Nom. and Ace. ^IC^ZTl'
Gen. cnyqqi-cn-
Dat. CT|U^iq]'ai-
Agent. q|y^q|-§j^-
Abl. ci|y^q|-5^^-
8. With some verbs the accusative may be formed in 0^\ e.g.,
p^'C'O]' ( or C;- ) qfC^-^Tc:' [ khd nga-la dung-song, he
BEAT ME. Its use in these cases is optional. With other
verbs OJ' cannot be used, e.g., p^"^'^^' ( not fS^cB^'aj' \
3'^'Q^^cn' kh'6 top'chhe sd-Jci du, he is eating food.
ya,
a yak.
yaJc-Jci,
of a yak.
yaM-la,
to a yak.
yaH-Hi,
by a yak.
yali-ne.
from a yak
32 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
9. In the literary language, if the noun ends in K'^' or
^* the genitive is formed by JJ' and the agentive by 'T)^' .
if the noun ends in 3i'^'^' or 0^' the genitive is formed by
q]' and the agentive by ^V^ ] It is only when the noun ends
in ^y or C^' that the genitive is formed by en* and the
agentive by ^i^ | But in the colloquial R\' and sn^' res-
pectively are, as a rule, used for all, especially by the lower
classes, though it is more elegant to give the forms used in
the literary language.
10. Nom. and Ace. cny^cn'C]' yolc-fo, a servant.
Gren. ZTjy^^j'q Q^' yoJc-po, of a servant.
Dat. ^l'sA>|CT|'C|'(^' yoli-'po'la, to a servant.
Agent. ^U^^*^^' yolc-po, by a servant.
Abl. qiyy[2T|"^'(3J^' yolc-po-ne, from a servant.
11. The plural is formed by adding to the nominative $,'
(sometimes pronounced ^ \ which, ending in a vowel, takes
after it the postpositions of a noun that ends in a voweL
Thus :—
Nom. and Ace ^C^^'^S' yali-tsho, yaks.
G-en. ^y^^'(S (^' yali'tsho, of yaks.
Dat. ^yv!^'(S'^' yali'tsho-la, to yaks.
CHAPTER III. 33
Agent. 2^y^=T|'c5^' yafc-tsho, by yaks.
Abl. 2^y^^'cB'(3ij^' yaJc-tsho-ne, from yaks.
12. All plurals are declined as above. There are thus
two forms of declension in the singular, but only one in the
plural. It should be noted that when it is apparent from the
context that the plural is intended, the singular form of the
noun is used; thus, Ij'p'^^'SJt'^'Q^Sl^' '^^^ kha-she yong-gi-
dit
, SOME MEN ARE COMING, lit. ^' MEN p'^/^^' SOME ^^Q*
Cv -s/^
cr|'Q.^27|' ARE COMING ; 5^' uot 5^'^' being used.
13. As regards the cases they are used in the ordinary way
except that the agentive is employed in place of the nomina-
•v-' •>'-' ~^'-' CV
tive with transitive verbs, thus. 2:nys|2T]'q^'P'^ C;'qj'a 2:qi'
yoJc-po kho diing-gi-dii, the servant is beating him, lit.
snc^qi'q^' by the servant, p' him, ^C^'2T]'Q^sT|" is beating;
Cs •V—' -V—' *v/— Cv "N
but ^C^'*o<3\*^]ys]^]'^'(^^*cn'^^ I sang-nyi yolc-po dro-M-re,
THE servant will GO TO-MORROW, lit. ^k'^(3j' TO-MORROW,
qriW^l'^l' THE SERVANT, Q^cn^qi'^ J WILL GO (SCO also Postposi-
tions, Cap. XI, paras. 1 to 3).
Words.
Your g^''^Q^' = khy'6-re.
Mother l^*^' = a-ma.
My QQ^' = 7ige.
Phari Z^q^"^' = Phari.
34
TIBETAX GRAMMAR.
Lhasa g'^' = hla-sa.
Father C|'CJ' = pa-pa.
To catch B^'^' =^ '^I'^n-pa,
Trader ^C^'C|' = tshong-pa.
One who catches 3<3\'^pc^' =
sim-hhen.
Thief m^'^' == kii-ma.
Are y^^' = ij'6.
Here 5|^^' ( Q^^'^' ) =- de.
Many = 5^C^*^' =mang-po.
Mule ^* = fre.
Name ^C^' = miny.
Exercise No. 5.
-VC^ Cs Ov Cv
Your mother's cat. ] j5^''S;Q^'l^'^(^'(^'^ | Ihyo-re a-me sKi-
mi.
My servant will go C;Q^*^]UsI^'i^'^^''^'<3;^ | nge yoU-po pha-
ri ne
n-re.
from Phari to Lhasa. g*^"f^'Q^^'cn''^^ ] hla-sa la dro-h
My father is beating the dog. C^'^'q^'P'^C^j'f^^^ ) nge
pa-pe khyi dung-gi-du.
The men who caught the thief are here, ff]^' ( ^<^'^' )
fe-tsho de-y'6.
Many women are coming. g25s|'C^T<3:-g;^C;'^*lMC'^'Q^'S^ |
hyi-men mang-po yony-gi-du.
This is a male mule. Q^'5|*^'^ff| di pho-t're re.
CHAPTER III. . 35
This man has done the work. ^'Q^^^'G|^'T['a^^'q^'q'^^ |
mi di le-JiU di cKe-'pa re. Lit. ^'Qs:^' hy thib- man,
CHl^^'TI'Q.^' the ivork, ^^'Z^'^^ I has done.
EXEECISE No. 6.
My father^s dog. Your mother's name. All the men are
here {lit. men, the, all, here, are). That woman is beating
your mule. Please give me food. He has taken service.
CHAPTER IV.
The Adjective.
1. The adjective usually follows the noun and in this case
takes the declension instead of the noun. If an article or
demonstrative pronoun accompanies, it comes last of the three,
and takes the declension, both noun and adjective in such case
remaining in the nominative case. The declension of adjec-
tive, article or pronoun, follows the same rule as that of nouns.
Thus, pC^'^J'-^jC^'^Q'^' lihang-fa chhung-chhiing-gi, of the
SMALL HOUSE, lit. pC'^' hon^-e, ^Z!'<^Q' small ^V of; pC^'^'
cBC^C^'^t^'^Cf^'3'"^^'^S^' A/itni^-^a chhung-chhung te-'i
gang-la cKa-chi du^ there is a bird on the top op that small
*^cv
HOUSE ; lit. pC^'i^'cBC^C^'^R' of that small house, |JC^'f^' on
the top, g'^^' « hird, Q^S^' ^'^^ Should the adjective be put
before the noun, it takes the genitive case, and the inflec-
tion is then taken by the noun if alone with the adjective,
but by the article or demonstrative pronoun if such accom-
pany. Thus, ^^'^(^*^^'^?I<3J'f2^* po-pe kyi-men la, to the
Tibetan woman. 'q2s'qS^'^^'2^^a^'^'(:M'P'ai^|'^|(3jC;'T^
^|(3JC I po-jte kyi-men t'e la Jiha-la nang-ro-nang^ please give
SOME FOOD TO THAT TiBETAN WOMAN ; lit. ^^'^Q.'^'^'^5|<3j'^'Cl^'
to that Tibetan ivoman, U^'O^^V food, ^]^\Q'^^V^*^\^!lP' | please
give.
CHAPTER IV. 37
2. Most adjectives end in Hp fo, which is but seldom
changed to ^' mo, when used with a feminine noun, e.g.
^^ ^'^Tj^'q'^cn' go-ma ka-po chi, a white mare. Note that
*sT[^'^' ka-po, WHITE is not changed to ^^^'^ ka-mo.
3. Several adjectives are formed from nouns — the noun
being put in the genitive case, thus : ^lCIC^'2T|"^2T|•q5J'^c^"
shing-gi naJc-pum chi, a wooden ink-pot, lit. NCfC^'cn* of wood,
^^}^'^^'^^]^' a7itnk-pot qj^a^'J-qjO^- ser-Jcyi ]cao, a golden
CHARM BOX. Also from adverbs, the adverb being similarly
put m genitive form, thus, Q^2Tl'^'pC'5^2T|' olc-Jci khang-mi,
LOWER ROOM, OJ^ meaning below.
4. Other adjectives are formed from words repeated,
thus : — ^-^.'g^' gor-gor, round.
Others from words repeated with this difference that the
first word has the inherent vowel a, the second a different
vowel ; e.g, Q^^X^'S^'Q^X^'X^' khyar-re khyor-re, shaky, tot-
tering. Such repeated words are in the colloquial usually
dissyllabic.
5. Adjectives denoting a negative such as tbose which in
English begin with in — , un — or end with — less are occasion-
ally rendered in Tibetan by ^^* me or ij^'q* me-pa, follow-
ing the noun concerned, e.g. V^^'^^ thrim-me, lawless, i.e.
38 TIBETAN GRAMMAE.
WITHOUT LAW ; '^'^^'^^'^' to7i-ta me-pa, useless, lit. without
MEANING. They are however more frequently rendered by
a negative. Thus : This is unfitting = this is not fitting and
is accordingly rendered Q^^T^^'Hf S^'Q^^^CT] | di o-po-min-du,
so
6. — ABLE, — IBLE are often expressed by ^<5I'^', e.g. p'O^^'
Q.^'3'^'C|'5^'Q^^2:n I I'ha-la di sa nyem-pa mm-du, this pood is
NOT EATABLE, i.e. IS NOT FIT FOR EATING, lit. ra'OJCn'Q^' THIS FOOD
a'^S'^' EATABLE, ^'Q^^^' IS NOT. Where the meaning is
that of READY FOR, use ^' or ^'cB^'^ e.g. p'aj^]'Q^^"3'c5^*
^cn'g^j'asrqi ! kha-la di sd chho-chho min~du this food is not
>9
YET READY TO BE EATEN.
7. The comparison of adjectives is formed by 0|^' le=than,
more than, thus : £'^"(^^'£'Q^^'c&<3;'^'^^ | ta t'e-le ta di
chhem-po re, this horse is bigger than that one, lit. £'Vn^^'
more than that horse, 6'(^^' this horse ^3C^'^^ is hig. Note
that the adjective itself remains unchanged. Some adjec-
tives, e.g. U^^V^y yaJc-lca, better, ^Q'^' mang-nga, more ;
(3^'^' chhe-iva, greater ; g^'^' hom-pa, thicker have separate
forms for the comparative. In such cases these are used with
OJ^' in the same way as the adjective whose form does not
CHAPTER IV.
39
change, thus : £'Q^^'CM^'^'f^^^' i^t di yal-Ha du, this is
THE BETTER HORSE; ^rO\'^'Q^^^\^0^^ te-U di yok-lia du,
THIS IS BETTER THAN THAT. Frequently the adjectival root is
conjugated like a verb, thus; ^'^^'^^'^'3'^^| ^'^'^^ ^*
hom-Hyi re, this is thicker than that.
8. The Superlative Degree of adjectives is formed either
by .Jcj^' sho or by the words '' more than all,'' ''from among
all" Thus: Q^^'^'^'5;^l dl chhe-sho re, this is the
biggest, |^C:'p^'S>^^q-a^^-Q^^'y^^'q^^2^ I gang-khe kyi-ne di
yaJc-po re, this is the best, lit. ^Q'pf^' cell, ^^^'^^' from
among, Q^-^^i^'ZyR^] this is good, ^^^'^s:^'0^^'s:,^^^^^
a^?'^q'm'«| tham-che le re-go di trap-kyi re, this
IS the thinnest cotton-cloth, lit. ^^^'^^'(^^' more than
all, S^^'^]S^'Q^' this cotton cloth, ^jq'm'^^' is thin. Again,
,3Sc;'3iI^'<9jC;'(3^^'a^^'?ic;'q^^^ I tshangme nang-ne di ring-fo
re, THIS IS THE longest, lit. <^C;'^Q^" all, (3^C<3j^' from among,
Q^^"^C^'C|''S:,2: j this IS long.
9. Note that glC'p | gang-kha, ^5^^'^^' tham-che and
^C^'3^' tshang-ma each mean all, and that ^5^' ^'^* ^^^ ^^'
nang mean among or in. They also govern the genitive case
and follow it. (See below under Postpositions, Cap. XI).
40
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Son ^' j5u.
Parents 5f'^' pha-ma.
Iron ^^^' c/ia.
Things, goods 6' (^') 0^^
cha-la.
Durable ^^'(5(3j'^' tro chhem
po.
Fat •^'ft^^'^' sha gyalc-pa.
Words.
Talk, speech ^^'(3B' ke-chha.
Foal l^'§]' ( ^^' ) i^-gi-
Brave ^C;'cB<3^'CJ' nytny
chhem-po.
^C heart, i<3j*"q' big.
Khampa, pS^^'CJ' kham-pa,
i.e. inhabitant of Kham
( p^^ ) large province in
Eastern Tibet.
Exercise No. 7.
This man is the son of good parents. J^'Q^'SJ'^' J^ZTl'i^J Q^'q'^C !
mi di pha-ma yaJc-pb jpu re.
Iron things are more durable than wooden things. i[C^'
shing-gi cha-la le cha-kyi cha-la tro chhe-lti re.
That fat woman is beating a foal. ^^'^SJ^J'^n'jS^Tl^'^'^^'
^^'Pl' (^^') ^^'^^'^'^^^I kyi-men sha gy alt-pa
t'e ti-gi chi dung-gi du.
It is my white mare's foal. Q^^'C^Q.'^^'S^'^^^'-^Q^'^^'^'
( 5Qs') ^^ I di nge g'6-ma ka-p'6 ti-gi re.
CHAPTER IV. 41
The Bhutanese are braver than the Chumbi Valley men, lit.
more than the Chumbi Valley men the heart of the
Bhutanese is big. ^'"^'q'GJ^'Q^gj^'q'^C^'^^a^-HfS;^ |
t'ro-mo wa le drulc-pa nying chhem-po re.
The Khampas are the bravest Tibetans. ^S'^'§iC^'Pf^'^§(^'
<9\^'P?I^'^'^C^'(^'^'^^ I po-pa gang-khe kyi-ne kham-
fn nying chhe-M-re.
This is nonsense [lit. useless talk). ^^'S'^'S^'^S'^^'^^*'^'
^R\ di ton-fa me-pe ke-chha re.
Exercise No. 8.
This is the thickest. He is that fat man\s son. Please give
me an iron ink-pot. Phari is colder than Lhasa. Many
Bhutanese will go to Lhasa. The man who caught the dog is
beating it.
CHAPTER V.
The Auxiliary Verb, '^ to be."
1. The conjugation of this verb is as follows : —
Present Indicative Tense,
Affirmative form.
C^'ysjc?;' nga-yin or IJ^^' yd^ I am.
ST^^' '^•^o-^/m or Kk' yd or ^^' re or (\^^' du, thou art.
pi'CA](3J' hho-yin or C^^ yd or ^^' re or Q^^^' f^it, he is.
C^'c5*^<3(' ngan-tsho yin or C^^' ^o, we are.
12^'^'^^' fchydn-tsho yin or C^s:' 7/0 or :^,^' re or t^^^^T]' dtt,
ye are.
P' <5'y^<5;' khon-tsho ijin or y^T^' 2/^' or ^^' 7V' or Q^^^' tZii; they
are.
2. ysj(5' and '^^' are used only in an attributive sense;
y^^' and ^^^' are used primarily in the sense of existing,
but are also sometimes used in an attributive sense. Thus:
rfi' (^<^') ^'3^'^P^'Cy^(3J I ku-ma sim-hhen ng a yin, I am.
THE MAN WHO CAUGHT THE THIEF. I am {exist) here, C^'3^^^'
( 0^^'^' ) ^^ I nga de yd, never C^'Sq^^' ( Q^^'^' ) :^(3j | nga
CHAPTER V. 43
de yin. He is good, p'CAI^l'CJ''^^ I kho yalc-po re or p'UsJ^'
i^'Q^m I kho yaJc-fo du.
3. Negative form.
C;'3^(5" ( ^(5' \ nga men or 2n|^' me, I am not.
raC'^r* l^Jiyo me or ^'^^' ma-re or ^'Q^^^Tj' mtn-du, thou
art not.
P'^^' kho-me or 5^'^^' ma-re or ^'Q^^^' mm-dii, he is not.
C^'cB'3^<3J' ( ^3C \ ngan-tsho ruen or ^^' me, we are not.
R^*(^'^^' hhybn-tsho me or 5^'^^' ma- re or ^'Q^^^ min-du,
ye are not.
PcB'iJ^' khon-tsho rtie or ^'5,^" ma-re or ^'C^^srqi' min-du,
they are not.
The distinction between ^^' and ^3\ l^^') i^ the same as
between U^^' and C^a: ]|
e.gf. y5'5]'C;^^'g^-^ra^'C;'^<gj- (^a^) p^C^aj] yi-ge di tri-khen
nga men kho yin, It is he, not I, that wrote this
LETTER (lit. the WRITER OF THIS LKTTER, I AM NOT, HE IS) .
The negative form is ^^'^'3^'^^| yo-iua-ma-re, e.g.
py^qi'q'5^'Q^2:qi I kho-yalc-po min-du, he is (I know) not
good, p'y^qi'q'y^^'CJ'g^'^^ | kho yak-po yo-wa-ma-re, he is
(I understand) NOT GOOD.
44 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
4. Is, ARE, WAS, WERE, joined to other verbs, or in the
sense of therb is, there are, there was, there were, may be
expressed by '^^] ^^^1 oi' ^^'^'^^* yo-wa-re. As a
general rule it may be said that C^^' means it I8 there ; I
SAW IT there and KNOW THAT IT IS STILL THERE. ^S^' meanS
I SAW IT there, but AM NOT SURE WHETHER IT IS STILL THERE OR
NOT. yyj^'z^'^ff' means I did not see it, but, understand that
IT IS there, e.g., the Dalai Lama is residing at Lhasa
Now-A-DAYs, |q2H'^qpj-^(^'"Hfl'^c:'^c:-^'^'a^'q(5jq]^''^|2^(^^
Q^R^l^'y^^] kyam-gon rim-po-chhe t'eng-sang hla-sa la sKu-den-
ja yd. This means " I saw the Dalai Lama at Lhasa and
know that he is still residing there." If we substitute (^^^'
for U^^ F it means " 1 saw the Dalai Lama at Lhasa, but am
not sure whether he is still residing there. '^ AYith y^J^'^r^^'
instead of l^^' it means " I understand that the Dalai Lama
is residing at Lhasa."
5. To form the interrogative add ^^' or i^' to CAJ^ f CAJdJ ]
^^- or ^2^-^ e.g. Sf^'q^ ] yo-pe, V^5^'q^ ] yim-pe ; C\^^^'
du, forms (^^^'^^' ( ^^') duJc-lce, according to the ordinary
rule for reduplication. [Cap. I, para. 27 (h).] Thus,
^^'QJZ'V^^}^Z\'^^^Z^^ I mi di yak-po re-pe ? is this man
GOOD ? 5^'^'(3JC^'f^'y^^'CI^' 'im te nang-la yo-pe, is the man at
CHAPTER V. 45
HOME ? (lit. IS THE MAN INSIDE ?). The interrogative particle
is often omitted where the existence of an interrogative
pronoun, ivho, what, where, etc., shows that an interrogation
is intended, p.g. ^'QJ^^'^K ] mi di -sii re, who is this man ?
6. The imperfect indicative, I was, and the perfect indica-
tive, I have heen, are the same as the present indicative, the
adverb ^(3j'(^' ngen-Ja, formerly or other adverb of time being
placed in front. Thus, ^'Q^^'y^^l'2:]'^^| mi di yafc-po re,
THIS MAN IS GOOD. S^j'q'li'a^cysj^l'Hf ?;^'s^^•f^•CAJ^|•q^3^•^^ I
ngen-la mi di yaU-po re tan-da yali-po ma-re, this man
FORMERLY WAS GOOD ; NOW HE IS NOT GOOD. P^'^'C^'^C^'^*^5^'
^'p^5'5J^ I khe-sa nga fang nyam-t'u Ihyo me, you were not
WITH ME YKSTERDAY. If the seuso is cloar from the context
the adverb of time may be omitted.
7. The future is LMC^' yong, which is the same for all
persons, singular and plural, thus, C^'y^^'ij'y^C^' nga yaU-po
yong, I will be good ; p'(^'y^^'C]'y\^C' khon-tsho yalz-po
yong, they will be good. For the negative insert ^' mi
before CXjC^" yong, thus, g^'y^^'^'S^'yslC khyo yali-po mi-yong,
you will not be good. Interrogative ysfC^'C^^' ( ZJ^' \ yong-
nge or C\IC;'C^" / C^^" \ yong-nga.
8. The conditional is ^^'3i yo-na, or Q^^rqi'^' du-na, for all
46 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
persons, singular and plural, past and present ; thus, C'y^^'
C]'yvI^'(3J' nga yak-'po yo-na, if I am good, or, if I were good ;
ro2:'y^cn'q'CA|^'(5' khyo yali-'po yb-na, if thou art good, or, if
THOU WERT GOOD. The negative is ^^'<3i' me-na, e.g. ro'y^STj'
i^'(^^"(3J' kho yaJc-po me-na, if he is (or was) not good.
9. The infinitive and verbal noun are formed from the
root with C|' added ; i.e. 'J^^^' | yb-pa, y^<3j'CJ | yim-pa, to be,
THE BEING, TO HAVE BEEN, THE HAVING BEEN, TO BE ABOUT TO BE.
The context tells whether they are present, past or future ;
e.g. ^'Ci^'V^^V^'^di^^'UJ^ ^'3^' I ^^^ yak-po yim-va nge
Ho cHung, I have heard that this man is good ; ^c3I'0^'^'Q.^'
l^271''Hf C^a;•q•5r2C;'S•^•|}•C;(3;•q^•^JC|C^ | ngen-la mi di yal'po
yim-pa Jco cHung-te fa mi'ugen cKe sha, I heard formerly that
this man was good, but now he has behaved badly (lit. has
acted the bad man).
10. The present participle is rendered by C^Ss'-s:^' yb-til,
negative ^5'5:^' me-t'ii, lit. at the time of hemg, C^'C^^'^'y^^'
^^' nga yalc-po yo-tu, when I am (or was) good; p'yvJ2T|'
Sfs^^'^^' A'/io yalc-po me-tu, when he is (or was) not good.
This participle is also rendered by UvJ^'^Q'^^'O]' yb-pe tu-la,
lit. AT THE TIME OF BEING or by UsJ^'i^'^C^' yo-pa fang. Past
CHAPTER. V. 47
time to be distinguished by adding ^(3v'Cl]' ngen-la, as with
the imperfect and perfect indicative.
11. The fast participle is formed by y\T^'<3[^' yb-ne, nega-
tive ii^'a^^' me-ne ; e.g. ^^'^^"^'^^'Si^' khijb yal-po yb-
P^ — j^ ^ — ,
yaJc-po me-ne, they^ not having been good.
12. y^Sv'^pa:' yb-Jihen, or y^^'^' y'o pa, forms a participle
used in an agentive sense, (See Cap. Ill, para. 3.) Thus,
^•Q^^'CAJ(3;'c:(3:'y^^'^p(3J'^cn'a;^^ | mi di ybn-ten yb-khen chi-re,
THIS MAN IS A LEARNED ONE.
13. This verb has no imperative of its own. The sense
of the imperative is often supplied by ^^' pronounced clii
— negative 5I'3S' '^'^'^'^^^^ these being the imperative of the
verb 3^'^' cKe-pa, to do ; thus, S^^'-^'^'^^' lail-pa ma-cKe,
DO NOT BE STUPID.
14. For denoting vagueness or generality, C^C^' yong, may
be used, e.g. ^^'Q^'f^s^cn'^C^'^'ysJC^' pb la In mang-po yong,
THERE ARE MANY SHEEP IN TiBET.
15. y^^' yo, is also used to denote having, possessing , with
the subject in the dative. Thus, R^'^'^'^^'^^ I ^%^-^^ ^'*
yb'pe ? HAVE YOU A HORSE ? ^^v'Q^'C^J^r'ff'^r l ngen-la yb fa
48
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
me, I HAD ONE, BUT I HAVE NOT GOT IT NOW. The QJ' may also
be omitted, thus : ras:'e'y^^'i^2^ J khyo ta yo-pe ?
16. For, potential, permissive, hortative and oytative forms
of the auxiliary verb as well as for such expressions as " m
ORDER TO be/' IT IS PREPARED FOR, IT IS PROBABLE, IT IS SUITABLE
FOR, see Chapter VII. For because it is, see Chapter VI.
17. In conclusion, it should be noted that Tibetan some-
times employs another verb where the verb to be is employed
in English ; e.g. '^^'^^'^'^'^'0^'::^^^^0^^J:^ | hhyo-re a-
ma hla-sa la de-dii, your mother is (lit. is remaining) at Lhasa.
--S CV
Words.
U.e =]pi'^Zi' kho-rang. I Darjeeling = ^'^'3]^' Dor-
je-ling.
Will be a thief, lit. will steal
Is staying = q^CQ^Ss^l' de- i .1^-
du.
Pen = U'^' nyu-gu.
When grown up, lit. when
the years rise = fl^*fllC^'(5'
lo-long-na.
Call, lit. make come = ^^]'
3^' ( 3^' ) ^'^^ ^^'^'
Monk = ^V^' tra-pa.
<
Where = ^VC]' la-pa.
Boy = ^*^' pu-gu.
ma ku-yo7ig.
Two = ^Vh^' nyi.
Tall, lit. long body=2:i|§2^2^'
q':^[;'q' siik-po ring-po.
Many = S^C^'^' mang-po.
Chinaman = g'^' gya-mi.
The Chumbi Valley = ^'Sf
t'ro-mo.
At home, lit. within = (3JC^'I1J'
nang-la.
CHAPTER V,
49
Exercise No. 9.
When he is (or was) at home. ] p^C:'<3^C;'^'5y2>^'^^ | kho-rang
nang-la yo-t'ii.
He is {lit. is staying) at Darjeeling. P'Fi'^C:'^'^^TS|'^^^ |
Ixho Dor-je-liny-la de du.
This is not my pen ; it is yours. C^S.'C^^'I?'^'^''^^ I iS^'"^^'
^^ [ di nge nyu-gu ma-7^e, khyo-re re.
He was a thief; now he is a good man. ^(^'f^'P'm^'^'^^'^'
y^ZTI*:^'^^! ngen-la kho ku-ma re, t'a yaJc-po-re.
If he is at home, call him here. p'a\C;'a|'Q^>^'(3v'^^^ ( ^S'^' )
*jCjcn'g^' ( 3S' ) I ^'^^ nang-la du na, de sho cKi.
He has been a monk, but is now a trader.^ ^^'f^^ P'^'^'^^'
^'^^'^'■^S I '^9^^'--^^ klio fra-pa re, fa tshong-pa re.
When the boy is grown up, he will be a thief. J^'^j'Q^^'a^'OI"'
NO
(3:'m(3j'5i^'7f|'C^Z' I pu-gu di lo-long-na, ku-ma ku-y on g.
I have two ponies. Caj'£'^-^^'ysl^ ] nga-la ta nyi yd.
YouaretalL g^^'q]|=T|^-Hf'^C;'q''?^j ^'^y^ '''^-V^ ^'''^'^"^^
Are there many Chinamen in the Chumbi Valley ? rn'^'OJ'
m'?^'^C^''^'U^^'C^^I I t'vo-mo la gya-mi mang-po yong-
nge ?
^ A common transition among Tibetans.
4
50 TIBETAN GKAMMAU.
Where is my mother ? C;^^'l^'^'^'^'-^|T^'Q^^^ | nge a-ma
]ca-pa de du ?
Exercise No. 10.
A boy is here. This man is stupid. I am at home. If
he has a good dog". He is not at home. Are all the men
here ? When I was in Darjeeling. The monk is cleverer
than the trader. The trader's father is the cleverest.
CHAPTER VI.
The Verb,
1. The Tibetan verb denotes an impersonal action, a state
of being, doing, happening, etc., and is in effect a verbal
noun. Thus : p^'!^^•^/^'3•2T|'Q,2:J^| | JM luH-sha sa-Jci-du,
HE IS EATING MUTTON^ lit., BY HIM, xiS REGARDS MUTTON, AN EAT-
ING is; (55k'^'^'^C:'^^'^^^^"y7k' I tshong-pa fe sang-nyi
lep-yong, the trader will arrive to-morrow, lit., as regards
THE trader, to-morrow, AN ARRIVING WILL BE.
2. There is no separate inflection in the verb itself, by
which one can distinguish between the singular and plural
numbers, or between the active and passive voices. Even
the different tenses are often the same in the colloquial as
used by ordinary, uneducated persons. By the accompanying
noun or pronoun one can tell whether the singular or plural
is meant. The accompanying auxiliary verb, and sometimes
an alteration in the root, gives the tense. From the context and
from the inflexion of the noun or pronoun, if any, one must
judge whether the voice is active or passive. The infinitive,
participles and some of the tenses are formed by adding
monosyllabic particles, e.g. <3J [ o^^ | ^^1 etc. to the root.
3. The verbal root-inflections, i.e. the changes in the roots
of the verbs for different tenses, are of less importance than
they otherwise would be, since in the colloquial of uneducated
persons the great majority of verbs use the perfect root for all
tenses. Thus, the verb to put in has in the literary language
four roots, viz. : —
52 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Present root Q^^^' jtc
Perfect do. ^i§^' chu.
Future do. ^^^' sKu.
Imperative do. ^^V chhu.
But the ordinary colloquial employs the perfect root i^lf^^j'
for all the tenses.
4. The exceptions to the above rule are : —
(a) Verbs, the present root of which end in the inherent a
or ^^ usually make this present root for the present indi-
No '
cative, future indicative formed by 2T|'l^'(^' JH-yin, negative
form of the imperative, present participle, asrentive participle,
present infinitive, and verbal noun, e.(/. 3'^'^^^| ^^'^-^'«--<^^,
HE IS EATING, from the present root g* not q3^''2'f2^^^ |
se-kyi-du ; ^'^'"^^ | ^^^^ H-re, he will request, from the
present root (3* not ^^'^ ^^ | sKu-kyi-re, from the perfect
root ®^ I But qSil' J'^^^' ko-kyi'du, he appoints, from
the perfect root qS?^' not '^^j'Q.i:;^^]' ko-U-du, from the
present root ^ |
Well-educated Tibetans use the present root of most verbs
for those parts of the verb, which are detailed in (a) above.
And, as the student improves, he will learn to do the same.
(h) In compound verbs, of which the second verb is 2T|(5IC^'q°
nang-wa (such verbs are used in the honorific language), the
CHAPTER VI. 53
first verb keeps the present root as a rale in all tenses; e.g.
^\^Z.'C' ( ^' ) ^15iC^' tong-nga nang-iva, to send, hon.
(c) In the imperative the root is sometimes changed. This
is dealt with below in the paragraph on the imperative (see
para. 12).
(d) As regards those verbs whose present and perfect roots
have the same pronunciation, it is immaterial whether we write
the present or perfect root. The present root is therefore
written for these, both in the grammar and dictionary, in
order to avoid the necessity of adding the literary spelling in
brackets in such cases.
5. The student is warned against using the different roots
for the present, future, perfect and imperative given in
general dictionaries. These hold good only for the literary
language and would often lead him astray in the colloquial.
For instance, the Lhasa man, educated or uneducated, will
always say ^^'^'^'^ >^ ! tap-kyi-dic, he sows (the field) ,
never ^S^^'5'^^^ I d^JP'^V^'du ; ^R^' being the perfect
and Q^i^^' the present root.
So also always ^^'UsJC;' ! nyo-yong, he will buy, from
the perfect root "^' never ^Kfc I nyo-yong, from the
future root ^ [
6. For simple conversation the perfect root is the most
important. We will now consider each mood and tense in
detail.
n
W^^' ^'^^^'V^i T*^ POUR.
54 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Present Indicative.
I C;^' nge or C^',$^'g^'^|'y\T^" ngan-tsho lulc-Jci-yo, I (or we)
pour (or am pouring).
luTc'lii-dii, you (or ye) pour {or are pouring).
ra^' liho or p' cS^'S^'^'^S^ 1 ^^on-tsho luJc-Jci-du, he {or
they) pours {or is pouring).
The U^K' and Q^^^' are often omitted, e.g. m^'^^\'^\' Irho
, ,. . "^ ^^
licJc-M, he is pouring.
Note that the agentive case of the pronoun is employed,
this being a transitive verb. (Chapter III, para. 13).
8. Imperfect Indicative. — This {I was pouring, etc.),
like that of the auxiliary verb, is the same as the present
with ^5J'fSJ' ngen-la or other adverb of time added.
9. Perfect Indicative.— ] C^" nge or z:'^^'^m;^^
i CJ' \ cX](5' ngan-tsho luH-lia-yin, I {or we) poured {or have
poured).
gS^'^^' (5^) ^Wo re or gs^'^^-gq|2^-CT|- (q- j ^^- khyon-
tsho luTc-Ha-re. You (or ye) poured {or have poured).
P^' A7io or p'cB^'S^^'^' (^') ^^ khon-tshb luJc-Ha-re.
He (or they) poured {or have poured).
Note the reduplication of the ^^ after 3^^'; ^^^^ that,
as in the case of the auxiliary verb, where CXJ^' is used
CHAPTER VI. 55
for the 1st person, Q^^^' is ordinarily used for the
2nd and 3rd, and where V^3i' for the 1st person ^^*
for the 2nd and 8rd. The perfect is also rendered by
^C* or ^C and sometimes by Q^^^' added to the root
of the verb, and the same for all persons, thus, C^^'^'
gC^' I nge Ho-cHung, I heard ; p\a'^C^' | hho shi-song^
HE DIED.
Note also here the difference of root referred to in para.
4 {a) of this chapter ; p^'(5('^'Q.^^' kho sKic Hi-du,
HE IS PETITIONING, but p^sJ'ja^'i^'-^C' hho sKu-pa re, he
HAS PETITIONED.
10. Pluperfect. — This (I had poured, etc.) is translated
in the same way as the perfect, just as the imperfect is
translated in the same way as the present. The context will
sometimes include an adverb of time, and will in any case
usually show whether the perfect or pluperfect is intended.
11. Future Indicative* — C^' nge or Z:^^'^VC^VV^9:
ngan-tsh'6 luJc-M-yin, I {or we) will pour.
ra^'^^' / m^' \ hhyd-re or |5^'c^^'S^'^''^S' f^hyon-tmo luk-
Jci re, you {or ye) will pour.
ra^' kho or p* ^^'3^V^V^^' kho7i-tshd lulc-M-re, he {or they)
will pour.
U^Z.' yong added to the perfect root of the verb may also be
used for all persons, thus, C;^'g^^'5fC' nge liiH-yong, I will
56 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
POUR; p'r^^'S^^'^^' Jchon-tsho hiU-yong, they will potje.
Neither the present nor the future root is used with y^[^'
in this sense^ e.(^. I will buy C^^'^^J'CXJC^' T nge nyo-yong, not
C^'^^'L^C^' I nge nyo-yong. I will do this work C^^'O^^'TI'
^S'3^*^^' I ^^^^ l^-'^'ci' di cKe yong ; ga^' the perfect root is
used^ not H^ the present root^ nor ^' the future root. The
ICE will melt rapidly. ]5^'^'^^^^'^'^(5)^'^^' [ Ichyak-
pa gyoTi-po sHii-yong. Here again the perfect root ^^2^' sKil
is used, not (S' sliu, the present root, nor ^\^' sKu, the future
root.
12. Imperative* — In literary Tibetan many verbs have
a separate root for the imperative as well as for the present,
future and perfect tenses, and such roots are given in general
dictionaries. But in the colloquial the imperative is usually
the present or perfect root of the verb. When the root con-
tains an inherent a or this is often changed to ; e.g.
5^£T]'f^^' miJc-fo, LOOK ! from present root ^' ta.
Send this man ! ^'Q^'2T|!^I^' | mi di tong}
Buy this thing ! rJS'^^'^^'*^^ I <^^^"^^ di nyd.'^
1 Present root. ^ Perfect and imperative root.
CHAPTER VI. 57
Tell (your) petition ! ^(3i*®*®5^ | nye-sKn b^il}
Sow THIS fikld! (SC^'P'QC '1:15^1 sKlng-kha di tajp}
In addressing sei-vants, coolies and others of low rank
^cn" shi is often added, e.g. Pour ! S^^'^'^^' luk-sM.
In addressing persons of somewhat better position ^cn^'^li3JC^'
rO'nang,^n(\ ^cn^'g^* ro-c^e, the former being the slightly
more polite of the two, are substituted for -P^ \ Thus,
S^^'^^^'^^^'l lu^-i'o-7iang, plpjase pour. Other particles
used after the imperative to soften it are ^Z,' pronounced €a
and l^" a. These soften the order, but are not quite so
polite as ^^^'^<3;C^' ro-nang or ^qi^'q^' ro-cKe, e.g. ^^'^^'
tO'ta, DO look! "S^'^'j^Cn'll^I I 0-71CI ^^i^-a, WELL, YOU MAY GO.
S^^^'^'^'l^ I de sho-a, come here, do. pq'^^''^q]3SI'^^C;' [
kho la t'ri-ro-nang . please ask him.
13. The negative of the imperative is formed by putting
5^' ma before the imperative, e.g.
c^ =^ ^-^ . -. .
Do NOT SEND THIS MAN, ^'C^-^'S^'cn^I^' | mi-d'i ma-tong.
Do NOT BUY THIS THING, ^^'^^AS'^''^' I ^^^^'^^ ^i ma-liyo.
^ Perfect root. ^ Perfect root.
58 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Do NOT TELL (your) PETITION, 5J<3J'Q'^'® I uye-sKu ma-sKu
Do NOT sow THIS FiELD^ (ojC^'P'QC'SlJ'^c^q | sKiTig-kha di ma-
lt will be noted from the above examples tliat verbs ending
in or usually take the perfect root for the positive im-
perative and the present root for the negative imperative.
Verbs ending in inherent a also take the present root for the
negative imperative^ e.g. ^^'^'^' mik-ma-ta, do not look.
^^'^'^' sha-ma-sa, do not eat meat. Those verbs, which
form irregular imperatives, take the present root for the
negative, e.g. ^^y sho, come ! S^'l^C^' ma-yong, do not come I
qicn* gyu, GO ! ^'^^' man-dro^ do not go !
14. It should be noted also that verbs of telling, ordering
and the like govern the imperative, thus, p'5;I^'^'^'^^'^^*
•iip\ I kho pha-ri la do lap shi, tell him to stay at Phari, lit.
TELL HIM STAY AT PhARI.
15. Conditional Tenses* — They are formed thus : Pre-
sent Conditional, if her son is ill the mother will be grieved,
q'C;^5'(3;'(3;' (it ill) t^'^l^'^^n-q^q-n^-Skf::;' pu di na-na a-me
dxik-nge cKe-yong (will be grieved, lit. will make grief). Past
Conditional, if I had known yesterday, I would have given it,
P^'^' khe-sa (yesterday) C^^'^'^'i3J' nge ha-ko-na (if I had
known) iq^^''^' (R') ^^1 te-ra-f/o (would have given).
Note that both for the present and the past the clause begin-
CHAPTER VI. 5^
ning witli if takes 5' added to the root of the verb ; that the
second clause, as in English, takes the future, when joined to a
present conditional clause ; and that, when joined to a past
conditional clause, the second clause takes the perfect indica-
tive changing U^(5' into CAI^" and ^^' into O^^^JVC Thus, if he
HAD KNOWN YESTERDAY, HE WOULD HAVE GIVEN IT. P^'^'P^'
^•cn'(3:"^^^'3;' j ^' \ Q.^^ | khe-sa kho ha-lco-na te-ra-du.
16. As, BECAUSE, SINCE is expressed by ^ZJ e.g. R^'cB^'
5^'^'3^'^C^'C^^'9^'^'^^ 1 khydii'tsho cKe ma-thujp-tsang
nge cKe-pa-yin. As you could not do it, I did it. ^^*<5'
N2TI'^C^'^2qi'qn*3;j'j^r I fH chhe-tra-tsang driJc-Jcl ma-re. This
will not do as it is too large.
Note that the adjectival root cB' is here conjugated as a
verb (see Chap. IV, para. 7).
17. Present Participle. This is formed by adding ^s^'
tu to the root, e.g. ^^'^'REZ^^'y^'^'^^'^^R^^'^Z: J kho
fre dung-tu mi chi lep-song, while he was beating the mule,
A MAN arrived. Or ^^'OJ* may be added to the infinitive (see
para. 23 below), the latter being put in the genitive ; e.g. p^'
^'i^f C^^'^d'^^'QJ'. kho t're dung-pe t'il-la, etc. This parti-
ciple may also be formed by adding ^'^C or ^'^Q* to the
root, e.g. '^^'^q^Z.^'^'^'kz^^^^^'^^' \\ ^^'^^ ^>^
diing-'pa-tang mi chi lep-song.
60 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
18. Past Participle— Formed by adding 3\^' ne to the
perfect root, e.g. (5'S^^'(9J^' chhn luJc-ne. having poured out
THE WATER. It takes also the place of a pluperfect and a
gerund. Thus: he has become rich by trading, p'(5Z.'^qiN'
(5:^'grn'^'gC^'C ( S^' \ -^^ [ kho tshony yyap-ne chhulc-po
cKung-nga-re. p' (he) ^Q'R^R'^^' [having traded) g^'^'
(rich) gCC (^') ^R] [has hecome). After he had
-<^-' CV -V CV
WRITTEN THE LETTER, HE DESPATCHED IT. p^l'^sl'qi'J^^'c^J^'
(having written) i^^C^'C^' ( ^' \ ^^ [ Ixho yi-ge t'rl-ne tang-
nga-re. This (3:^ | 5: the conditional and s:^' the present
participle make up largely for the poverty of the Tibetan
language in conjunctions.
19. Agentive Participle.— Formed by C^aj | ^^(^ | C]'
or ^* added to the root. These Agentive participles may
have either a past, a present or a future signification. C(3j'
and ^p(3J' are used with animate objects and have an active
signification. C|' or ^' when used with animate objects de-
note the passive. With inanimate objects Z^' or 2^' are used
in preference to C^(3j' or 3^p^ | CJ' is used after vowels and
C^' <^' or O]' . Q^' after the other final consonants. Examples :
CEAPTER VI. 61
— The messenger, who went yesterday. p^ ' ^' Q^Cf]' Qdi'
( ^p(3J' ) ^C-t^f^J'^ I khe-sa dro-ngen pang-chhen t'e.
The messenger who will go 'io-morkow. ^C55\'Q.^'CZ(3i'
(5^pi(3j') ^C^3j'^ I sang-nyi dro-ngen pang- chhen t'e.
The man who sent the letter yesterday. p^'^'C;v]'2T|*2TlS^'
C^(3I' ( 5^p(3[' \ ^'^ I fihe-sa yi-ge tong-ngen mi t'e.
The letter which was sent yesterday. p^'^'i^E:[^'CQ'
CV CV -V "^
I J^::2 • \ yvJ'cn'C | khe-sa tang-nge yi-ge te.
The man who was sent yesterday. p^'^'^^C^'CQ' ("^^')
5n|*^ I khe-sa tang-nge mi te.
It will be noticed from the above examples tliat Q^' and
3^P<3v* do not usually take the genitive case.
20. Verbal Noun. —Either takes the infinitive form or is
formed by adding U^' ya to the root, e.g. R^'V^' t'rd-ya, the
running away from 3^'^' tVo-fa, to run away. ^5^^'*^'
2:^q^'L^'a^'y^cn'q'5q'^5: I male gyap-tu tro-ya di yalc-po
ma-re, the running away when a battle is being fought
/rg;]qi'^q'2:^'\ is wrong. Again: now-a-days is the time
for going to India, 2r-5;c;-^C;'J|'ai'Q,^'q(^' ( or Q^g-y^Q^* )
ra^sJ'^^C' t'e-ring-sang gya~la dro-we €u re, lit. ^r-^c^'^C (now-
62 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
A-DAYS) qi'^' (to India) Q^^'^Q^' {op going) ^^' (the time) ^^'
(is). Infinitives and verbal nouns can also be formed from
other parts of the verb. Thus^ 9^'^' '^^ ^° ^^' '^'^^ doing,
g^'cg^'-^' ( ^' ) 01' 3'^'^'^'^'^' '^^^ HAVING finished DOING,
yalc'po cHung, lit. the having finished the discussion is good,
i.e. IT is good that the discussion has been finished. Simi-
larly gsv"a3yy^^'^' the being on the point of doing, q^'
5i'ysJ5J'^' THE being about TO DO, OR THAT WHICH IS TO BE
DONE.
21. Verbs governed by verbs of seeing, perceiving, hearing,
THINKING, believing, KNOWING, SAYING, etc., take the form of
tbe verbal noun; e.^.'p'^=T]^'q'y5<3j'^'C:^'^'5y?Jc;' | khokuk-
pa yim-pa nge ha-Jco song. I perceived that he was a simple-
ton, g^s^-p-q^-a^^'cg^'^' (T) '^5j'(3^' (^^') q^5^'3c;'|
khyo kha-la se-tshar-ra yin-na sam-cKung. I thought you had
finished eating.
22. In order to, for the sake of, for the purpose of and the
like are frequently rendered by the verbal noun in tlie geni-
tive followed by ^'q* or "^'^^qi-q-^ e.g. ]^'^^'0^^R'
qa^'?a;'a|'C;2^'5^^Q^'a|^'5^C;'5''^5^'^'^'3i | kham-chhudithop-
pe ton-la nge kajp-le mang-po gyap-pa yin ; I have endured
a great deal of trouble in ordrr to succeed in this law-suit.
CHAPTER VI. 63
hha di tap-pe ton- fa-la nga de yong-nga-yin ; I have come
HERE FOR THE PDRPOSE OF SOWING THIS FIELD.
23. Infinitive. -This is the form of the verb found in
dictionaries and vocabularies. It is the present root with CJ'
jpa added in the case of roots ending in ^'^'(3['^'3^'i^ f Ha^ t'a,
na,pa, ma, sa, and with l^' iva added in the case of roots end-
ing in a vowel or C^'Q^'-^'O] | nga, a, ra, la. It is used in the
sense of in order to ; e.g. ^^W^^^'^O^X^f^^ (^^'^)
cv ^ ^^^ ^ ^ ^
^'^'^'''s^ I haV6n-fung-la tshong gyaJc-Jca chhim-pa-re, he has
GONE TO Kalimpong TO TRADE. m' added to the present root
also expresses the infinitive. Thus, ^•Q.^l'^'^l'c^^^'l^s: | ia
dro-gyu Jca-tsho yd, how far (have we) to go now ?
Several verbs, e.g. Ccq^'q* go-pa, to be necessary, ^q'^'
thujp-pa, to be able, ^cn-q' chhoJc-'pa, to be allowed and
Q^^^'^' do-pa, to wish, take the root and not the infinitive
of the verb which they govern ; e.g. ^'irJ^'Qcn-^rn'cn'j^r i
€a khyb dro chho-h'-re, you are permiti'ed to go now.
24. As a general rule, it may be said that when a verb
can be turned into a verbal noun it should be translated as
one. Thus " Now-a-days is the time to go to India " is trans-
lated into Tibetan as above " Now-a-days is the time of going
to India. ^^ Similarly, " It is wrong to run aicay when a battle
is being fought " is translated " The running aivay when a
battle is being fought is wrong. ^'
64
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
WOKDS.
Official = ^^(3\'^' pom-po. \ To know = ^JQ^'^' she-pa.
Messenger = -^ C^'cB(5J' pang- Quickly, soon = ^2^^'^'
Men. ^y'^-P"-
Mule man =
^'^^' t're-pa
Water = c^" chhu.
To, into the presence of = ' To learn = qgp'::j' lap-pa.
g'O^' tsa-la.
To make effort, strive :=^
cKe pa.
Tibetan language = ^^'^^'
Difficult = :^rTjQ^-aj^- pqj'q-
ka-le hhali-yo.
T «^ "^ .
Letter == U^'^T]' yi-ge-
To receive = Os^^^'Pi" jor-iva.
po-ke (derived from Cf^* ' Kalimpong = ^TIQ.' ^(3\' 55^^'
Ixa-lon-pung.
To buy == f^'Z^' nyo-ica.
po, Tibet and ^^'(^' ke-
chha, speech).
Exercise No. 11.
I see the house. C;^'pC^'C|'5^'^I.'2^'(^^^] | nye khang-pa
thong-gi-du.
1 will see your house to-morrow. ^C^'^^j'R^'-^^a'pC^'q'C^'
5^^'^'iT|'^'(3j I sang-nyi khyo-re hhang-ya nye miJc-ta-
ki-yin.
The official has sent a messenger to me. ^^3J'2^^'^Z'(^(3J'5^'
C^'g"ai'^"?i'C;" ( q' j ^I^C'^C;' | pom-po pang-chhen
chi nge tsa-la tongnga nang-cKitng.
You have sent your worst pony ; please sell me a better one.
CeAPTER VI. t)5
^cn'c&C'^^^'^^ I Jchyb-re ta dufc-shb chi tang-dii yak-
Jca chi tshony-ro-cKi.
He is beating a mule. p^'C?C^'2T|'(^^2^cn | khbt're dung-gi-du.
He was beating the muleman yesterday. p^'^Vp^'^'^'
?^'^T|'Q.^^^ | khe-sa khb tre-pa dung-gi-du.
If you work hard [lU. make effort) you will soou know Tibetan.
ysIC«' I khyo-re nying-rii cKe-na pb-ke gyok-po she-yong.
Do not beat the pony. Sj-^'^^' \ ^^ '^na-dung.
Tibetan is difficult {lit. the learning Tibetan is difficult).
^'^^'^H^'^'^^^'^^'P^'^'^^^I ^'^"^"^ lap-ya
ka-le khuk-po-re.
I received the letter from Dawa Tshering {lit. sent by Dawa
Tshering) yesterday. p^'^'^'q^'^'^r^i^^'^'^^^'C^S^'
(R(i') '^'^'^'C;'a^'^3^'5C' ] khe-sa Da-wa Tshe-
ring-gi tang-nge yi-ge fe nga-la jor-cKung .
After going to Darjeeling, go to Kalimpong. R^'^'^'n]^'^'
2ov'(3;^'2^^Q^'Sav'UC;'a]'q|^ | J^hyo Dor-je-Ung-la chhin-
ne ka-lonpungla yyu-
When you are at Kalimpong, buy a pony. R^'^^'^'^^'l}^'
a^'q^ff'r^*F'5Cn'^2^ ! khyb ka-lon-pung-la de-tu ta-
chi ny'6.
5
66 tibetan grammae.
Exercise No. 12.
He is buying. The trader has bought these goods at (lit.
from) Lhasa. Call my servant. Do not pour the water. I
have sent a messenger to Darjeeling. If you had petitioned
the official yesterday, he would have sent a good pony. I
am going to the bazaar to see whether there are any new
arrivals (lit. comers, from cXjCZ'^' to come) from Lhasa.
CHAPTER VII.
The Verb — continued.
1. Negatives* — The negative used with the present and
future indicative (except with ^^* ) is ^" mi. With all other
tenses and with ^^' re even though in the present or future ^'
ma IS used. The negative with '3^5^ yin is shortened into ^di'
men, that with y^Ss' yb into ij^' me. Thus : H'C^t'^'lj'a^S^cn-
kho yong-gi min-du, he is not coming ; p'y^C^'^]'^^'^^' kho
yong-gi ma-re, he will not come ; ^C^'^^J'p'^^I^^'S^'UsJC;' |
sang-nyi kho lep-mi-yong , he will not arrive to-morrow ;
^'^^'^'^^ I ^^^^ dro-Jci men, I will not go ; C^^'^^'
3'^S I ^^^^ shmg-gi-me, i do not know.
2. With the perfect indicative ending in ^^' it is better
to place the negative before the root ; e.g. he did not go
yesterday, ra^'^"|H'5^'g(5J'C]'^^ I khe-sa kho ma-chhijn- pa-re,
in preference to g^J'CJ'^'-^^ J chhim-'pa ma-re, though
neither is incorrect.
3. Never is translated by 5^'^C^' ma-nyong, following
the root of the verb, e.g. C^'g'SIC^'f^'R^'^'JJC^' | '^^^ Dor-
Je-ling-la dro ma-nyong, I have never been to Darjeeling.
(58 TIBETAN GKAMMAE.
4. Intcrrogatives* — These follow the rules given in
Chapter V, para. 5. To these must be added the rule that QZ!'
cKung, ^C song, and ^C nyong (this latter without ^' ma^
meaningEVER) take Q^* nge. Thus: has my father arrived ?
C;a'CJ'C]'-^^^^'5C;'C^ 1 7i^ep«-J'a lejpcKung-nget Again, have
•^/— ' ^«— -^ Cv ^^.^^-^
YOU EVER BEEN TO Dar.IEELING ? RS'^'S n'^'^'^^'S^'^'^ 1
Cv
khyo Dor-je-ling-la dro riyong-nge ? Sometimes U^^' is used
instead of -^^^ in interrogative sentences for the second
person, singular and plural, e.(/. p5^''2J'^'f^'Q.^'^"A'<^'^^ !
hhyo lila-sa-la dro-Hi yim-pe ? are you going to Lhasa ?
5. An interrogative is also formed by t^'U^^' a-yo (pre-
sent tense) l^'C^^' a-yong (future tensei. Thus, C^^'ni'Q-^'
g^'(5['y^27i'q'^'y^TC^'| le~ka di cKe-na yaJc-po a-yong ? if you do
THIS, WILL IT TURN OUT WELL ? (lit. WILL IT BE GOOD ?). 2^'CT|*QC'
<
yak-po cKe-ne de-kyi a yd ? is this boy doing well at school ?
6» Finally, an interrogative with a future meaning is
formed by adding ^V to the root. Thus, C;'(35'^'5,'a|q'cn j
nyan-tsho ka-re lap-ka ? what are w^e to say ? what shall
WE Say r
7. Passive Voice* — As shown above (Chap. YI, para. 2)
the Passive Voice is not distinguished from the Active in the
same way as in English. Thus, he is heating me, is expressed
CHAPTER VII. 69
in Tibetan hy him to me a heating is. So in the Passive Voice
/ am being beaten is expressed to me a beating is. The only
difference therefore between the Active and Passive is that
the Agent is omitted in the latter. Thus : —
Present C ( RS' P' ) ^^'^'^^^' '^^^ l^^^^", Iiho)dung~gi'dit,
I (you^ he) am being beaten.
Future C^' ( RS' P' ) ^^C^^'^C^' '^W^ O'-'hyo, kho) dung-yong.
I (you, he) shall be beaten.
Perfect REH^^'^'Z,' dung-song, or ^^C^^'Q.^^' dung-du, or
'^^C^^'^^^' dung sKa, Have (has) been beaten.
Future Passive Participle ^C^' dung-gyu, To be beaten. So
also ^U^'RcB^'^' y^ tshong-gyu, Turquoises to he sold or
turquoises for sale.
The Passive should, as far as possible, be avoided in trans-
lating, the corresponding Active tense being used instead.
8. Potential Verbs. — When can, could mean is able to,
translate by ^■^'^' to be able, added to the root of the verb ;
e.g. YOU CAN {i.e. are able to) go to Darjeeling, R^'^' S'SI^''^'
^^'i^^'^n'-^S, I khyo Dor-je-ling-la dro thup-Icyi-re. He can
DO THIS, P^'Qi^'3^'^^'[5''^S1 ^'^'^ ^^'^ ^^^ thup-kyi-re. It
will be seen from the above examples that the subject is put in
the agentive case, when the main v6rb is transitive and in
the nominative case, when the main verb is intransitive. A
similar rule applies to the permissive verbs and to the horta-
tive verbs dealt with in the two next paragraphs.
70 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
9. Permissive Verbs* — When can, could mean is al-
lowed TO, translate by ^^'^' chholc-pa, added to the root of
tlie verb; e.g. "^^'Tl'^Cf^'Q^^'^'^]'^^ ] ^'hyo -Dor-Je-
ling-la dro chhoJc-M-re, you can {i.e. are allowed to) go to
Darjeeling.
10. Hortative Verbs* — When should means ought, need,
WANT, WISH OR MUST, it is translated by ^^^'^' go-fa, added
to the root of the verb, e.g. you should {i.e. ought to, or
must) go to DA.RJEELING, RS'^' S'^^' ^' ^^'R^^' J]' ^S |
nhyo Bor-je-ling-la dro go-kyi-re.
11. Optative Verbs. — These, denoting wish and regret,
are rendered as follows : —
e.g., Would that my brother were here ! C.f5^'|}5j'T)^|'^^^'
( ^^^'^ ) ^^'(3i'I^ I nae pun-lcya de yo-na-a.
If only he would eat his food ! p^'p'f^^'S'^^ri^'q^',?'^ |
I'ho kha-Ia sa-ro cKe-na-a.
If only he would bring my pony ! S^' QO^'c' ^' ^R^' ^^C^*
^^^'3^'^'^ I kho nye ta-fe thri yong-ro cKe-na-a.
12. Another form, used in religious prayers or blessing,
is as follows : —
May the prosperity of the (Buddhist) religion long prevail !
q^(5j-q'5^3j'^C'cr]aj^'q^'qT['^^-^ | tem-pa yun-
ring ne-pe tra-shi sho.
CHAPTER VII. 71
This sentence is frequently used at the end of a prayer.
May you be happy ! S::'§2v*q'LMC^'^^'-S^ | l^-hyo kyi-po
yong-nga sho.
May you have a long lifcj free from illness! RS'cB'^^'
j^^'^^'l^C^'^^'-A^ I llrvyo t she-ring ne-me yong-nga sho.
These two latter examples might be used by an old man
blessing a young one.
The language used is literary, rather than ordinary collo-
quial, but is used colloquially for the above purposes.
13. The imyninence of an action is expressed by 0^ tro,
added to the root; e.(y., pq^l'^'f^'H^'Q^^Q^^^ZTj | kho pha-
ri-la lep-tro-dn, he has nearly reached Phari.
14. Prohahility, likelihood are expressed by Qcn* tro or
q-Q^!^' pa-dra. e.g. ^Z^q]^'^'0^'q^!;^^'^d^'c(^' (or V^5^'
CJ'O^^' \ hho pha-ri-la de-kyi yin-tro or yim pa-dra, he will
PROBABLY sTxAY AT Phari. The negative forms are ^(5I'Q^^'
q^^'rn'5^(3j' (?5<3J'\ ^IJ'Q^^, ] kho pha-ri-la de-kyi mem-pa-dray
HE WILL PROBABLY NOT STAY AT PhARI.
15. Completion is expressed by the verb ^\'q' tshar-wa,
TO finish, added to the root; e.(/., p^'^W'S^'*^'^!-^' | ^'^^'^ ^'-*
se-tshar-song, he has finished eating.
72 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
16. Wlien an action is habitual or general the future form
in 5,2^' is used. Thus, ^•5I'5;'5;'^^-q'qq' (S^^*) 5'^^1
nyi-ma re-re chha-pa jpajp-kyi-re, rain falls every day.
17. That an action is continuing is expressed by the root
with ZTI' once repeated and followed by the verb 3S'^' ^'9">
dro-Hi cKi-a, nga fan-da lep-yo7ig, keep moving on ; I will
COME presently.
18. Verbs of becoming, changing into, altering into,
GROWING, etc., are often expressed by Qcn'q' governing the
dative, e.g., this yellow colour is becoming red. c^^'^^'
^ '^S'S^^'^'^'^^'^ I ^^^^ ser-po di mar-po-la dro-lci. It is
very common with the comparatives of adjectives; e.g., this
HAS BECOME LESS. ^^' '^C'^'g^'(oj^ ] di oiyuiig-TU chhin-sKa.
Note the use of ^' here. It is used with some words in
the place of 0^'
19. ^'sa, PLACE, is joined to many verbal roots, e.g., ^^'^'
d'6-Sa, RESIDENCE (lit. PLACK OF DWELLING, from ^^'CJ' TO
REMAIN, dwell) ; O^^'TI'^^'^* le-ka cKe-sa, place where one
DOES ONE^s WORK, from g^'^^l' cKe-pa, to do.
20. To have leisure to, time for doing is expressed by djC^
long, joined to the root of the verb concerned, e.g., C^'^'f^
CHAPTER VII. 73
QCJ^'O^C^'^^'Q •>^^] I nga mi t'e-tsho thre-Iong min-du, I have no
TIME TO SEE THOSE MEN.
21. That the time for doing something has arrived is ex-
pressed by ^(3J" ren, e.g., ^'^^'-^^'^C" | t'adro-ren-song, it is
TIME TO GO NOW ; s:'3'^(3:'a ^qi | ta sa-ren-du, it is time to eat
NOW (it is meal-time).
22. To BE READY FOR^ TO BE PREPxAUED FOR, is expressed by
^^' chho, ^qi'^qi' chholcchho joined to the root of the verb.
To BE FIT FOR, TO BE SUITABLE FOR IS expressed by ^^i^' ny em-
pa similarly joined (See Chap. IV, para. 6).
23. ^r joined to the root of the verb, and followed later by
^' denotes
Indeed ... ... ... but
It is TRUE ... ... . . BUT
Certainly ... ... ... but, etc.
e.g. J He certainly hears but he does not heed, ^'^'^'^'^^"n^'
C'p^'^a:-g'^'« I /(o-ta lo'li dulc-te JM.nyen-lcyi ma-re.
I did indeed see him, but I DID NOT RECOGNISE HIM. 5^^^'^
^"^^'S^T^^^^'^^^'^'S^' I ^'^ong-ta thong-cKung'te nge
ngo-she ma-cKung .
In the literary language the spelling of this particle ^
varies according to the letter immediately preceding it, but
in the colloquial the pronunciation is always te.
74
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
The meaning of ^' . . . ^' corresponds to tliat oi to . . . lehin
in Hindustani.
24. Verbs of receiving follow the same rule as WsJ^' in the
^Qw^e oi possessing (Cap. V, para. 15). Thus, C^'^'^9^'3^' I
nga-lajor-cKung, I have received.
25. A few common verbs which are irregular may be
noted as follows : —
Infinitive.
Present.
Perfect.
Future.
Impera-
tive.
Negative
Impera-
tive.
Kfrq-
2Tc-^-
Syt'c:-
5rr§j'y5<3j'
m'
SI-iMC-
yong-wa,
to come
yong-
gi-yd
yong-gi-
yin^
not Sfc
sho.
ma-
yong.
yong-
yong.
1
nga-
1
ym.
a,f^-t^i5j-
m'
S^-Q^f
wa, to go 5^r •
dro-M-
chhim-
dro-lci-yin
or ^^^z:
gy«-
man-
dro.
yo.
fa-yin.
chhin-
1
3^-q-
yong. 1
^'■5^'
pa, to do
^^-
%
cKe-kyi (qff-\
ma-cKe.
cKe-kyi-
yd.
cKe-'pa-
yin.
cKe-yong.
CHAPTER VII.
75
Thus C'CXjC^'^l'y^^' nga yong gi-ijo, I am cominc (xow).
P'ys|C^'qi'^C' kho yong-gi-re, he will co]\ie. ^^c^* sho, come 1
2^'y^C^' ma-yong, do not come ! P'^^'^'^^^' ^'^^^ dro-fci-
du, HE IS GOING. p'S^'^'-^^ J kho chhim-pa-re, he has gone.
26. As will have been noticed from the examples in this
and the preceding chapters the verb is always placed at the
end of the sentence. When there are two verbs in a sentence,
one governing the other, the governing verb comes last; e.g.,
!3^'S^'<^^'^' ^^'^yo-cJihin chholi-lia, you may go. C^^'I^^'TI'
a^'n^'3^'[^'3^''^^ J nge le-ka di cKe thup-kyi ma-re, I cannot
N3
DO THIS WORK.
Words.
. Mutton, (lit. sheep-flesh).
f:ycT|•^^• luk-sha.
Pork, {lit. pig-flesh). Z^^\'sP^'
phak-sha.
Darjeeling. ^'£'3]^^' Dor-je
Bazaar. R^' throm.
Week, q^ajl q^^!^'^^^' du7i;
dun-th7m.
To assemble. Q^cn^'CJ' tsho-
fa.
Sunday. cn3C;^-a'3q' sa-nyi-ma.
To make, build. ^3'-^' so-ica.
To see. 5^^[;'^' thong-u-a.
At the time. glCZ'H^' gang -hi.
Meaning, purpose. ^^'^^'
ton-t'a-
Pleasant, comfortable. ^^*^'
kyi-yo.
To look at, see. S^^m-f^-jq- ^,i^'^'.
ta-iv<i.
To arrive. ^j^'CI' lep-pa.
Village. 2T|C^'^]^^' trong-se.
76
TIBETAN GRAMMAE.
Name. ^C' 77img.
To say, be called (of a name),
a^'^' ser-wa.
What. ^V^' lia-re.
Lie. ^^'^ ] ham-'pa, ^^^%^
kyalc-dziin.
Whip. Sa'^g^l' te-cha.
New. 2T1^^'21J' 5a-pa.
7na
Before. ^c^J'dJ' ngen-la.
Rinchengong. ^^'(^(^'IjC:'
rin-chen-gang.
Exercise No. 13.
The turnip has been eaten. '?>C^'^'C^sr'q3^'^C^' T nyung
di se-song.
The turnip will be eaten to-morrow. ^C^'^as'^oC^'^'Q^s^'^S^'
ys|C^' I sang-nyi nyung-ma di se-yong.
Eat this mutton, but do not eat this pork. a|Z71'-n'Q^^'a |
^[fcn'^'Q^r'jq-^ I luH-sha di so, phaJc-sha di ma-sa.
Every week a large bazaar is held (lit, assembles) in Dar-
jeeiing."^|-gQ'q-q^3^-^-5;-a|'giq'^5j-"Hf^-^^
y^^ I Dor-je-ling-la dun re-re-la thromi chhem-po re
tsho-kyi-yd-
The large bazaar at (lit. of) Darjeeling will not be held to-
morrow but will be held on Sunday. ^C^:5j*^'£'g]C^'
sang-nyi Dor-je-ling Hi throm chhem-po t'e tsho-Jfyi ma-
re sa-nyi-ma tsho-yong.
He has almost finished building the house. p^'pC^'Q^^'
^a^'f^S^'f^^'^^^ I ^'^^' Jihang-pa di so tsha-tro-du.
CHAPTER VII. 77
Did you see the man who came yesterday ? p^'^'^^C^'S^P^'
^'^'¥^'^^' ( 3^ ) ^¥-3^'^^ I ^^^-^'^ yong-khen
mi t'e hhyo-re thong cHung-ngi^. ?
I did not see (him). (He) came when I was out. C^'<3sl^C^'5^'
5c:' I q'ii«^'qQ^-||C:-q'2^:;'C:' ( ^' ) ^^ I nge thong-ma-
cKting, nga m^e-ye gang-la yong-nga-re.
It is unnecessary for him to go to Phari. {Lit. There is no
reason of his having to go to Phari). p'^qi'^'Q^'Qin'
^3fj^'y^^'^'^CT|-SXK'q-^-^^ I kho fha-rl-la dro go-
ya fon-fa yo-wa ma-re.
Have you ever been to Darjeeling? ig^'c'S'SIC^'f^'f^^'^-^'
C^ I khyd DoT-je-ling4a dro nyong-nge ?
No. {lit. not been). ^*3^[^' ma nyong.
I am going to see whether Darjeeling is a pleasant place.
Dor-je-ling kyi-fo a-yo nga miU ta-ka dro-ki-yin.
Exercise No. 14.
We have nearly reached the village. What is its name ?
{Lit. What is its name called) ? Rinchengong. Have you
ever been {lit. arrived) here before ? Go on asking him
about the road. Tell him that if he tells (any) lies he will be
flogged. He is unable to come to Darjeeling. I am not
allowed to buy pork. You ought to learn Tibetan.
CHAPTER VIII.
NUMEEALS.
1. The numeral like the adjective follows the noun. If
the noun is accompanied by an adjective the numeral follows
the adjective. Tims C;'aj'£'^^5|' {three) C^^ | nga-la ta sum yd,
1 HAVE THREE PONIES. C;*a^'£'y^^'^'^^5^'y^^ | nga-la ta yal-
fo sum yd, I have three good ponies.
2. The cardinal numerals according to ^C^-^^'J]' ( or
^CJ^^'T]'] ^3^'^C^' trang-kyi (or tsi-hyi) nam-trang, i.e.
arithmetical notation, are as follows : —
Tibetan word.
English
Tibetan
figure.
figure.
In Tibetan character.
In Roman character. .
1
9
qi5=Il-
chi.
2
^
^19^-
nyi.
3
?
=tl.N51-
sum.
4
C5'
q^-
sKi.
5
Y
^'
nga.
CHAPTER VIII.
79
English
Tibetan
figure.
Tibetan word.
figure.
In Tibetan character.
In Eoman character.
6
sS
I=T
t'rulc.
7
V
N5
diin.
8
L
^S'^-
gy^'
9 '
0
^3'
gu.
10
^0
q^' or q§-^5I-q-
chu or chii'tham-fa.
11
99
=I§'=fl5=T|-
chuJc-chi.
12
9^
SIC'^?^'
chu-nyi.
13
n
q^-qj^sj-
chuH-sum.
14
9^
=JS'^^'
chup-sKi.
15
9Y
cho-nga.
16
9^
^i'5=T
chu-fritJc.
17
9V
chup dun.
18
9L
q'yq^s^'
chop-gye.
19
9(^
^§-'>3'
chugii.
20
^0
|-.^- or ^-^'Siyj-q-
nyi-shu or nyi-shii
tham-pa.
80
TIBETAN GKAMMAR.
Tibetan
figure.
Tibetan ^oed.
In Tibetan character. In Eoman character.
21
^9
f-^-^'^i^-
?i?/i shii tsali-cM.
80
50
^T5^'§' or ^5^-^'
sum-chu or sum-chu
gs^'^'
tham-pa.
31
V
^5q'§-?f^52^-
sum-chu so-chi.
40
c^o
^^'^§' or q^'q§'
sKip-chu or sKip-chu
1^3^'^'
tham-pa.
41
^9
^^'^§'^*^^^'
sKip-chu sKe-chi.
50
VO
fg'q§' or (^-qg-
ngap-chu or ngap-
gs^-q-
chu tham-pa.
51
y?
g'^:i§-c;-2^S^]-
ngap-chu nga-chi.
60
vSo
S'^'S' or 5^i-§-
trulc-chu or truJc-
g^^rq-
chii tham-pa.
61
^9
5^'S'^'^§^'
fruH-chn re-chi.
70
yo
q^<5j'§' or q-^3j'§'
dun-chii or diin-chu
tham-pa.
71
V9
dun-chu ton-chi.
CHAPTEK VIII.
81
Tibetan word.
English
Tibetan
figure.
figure.
In Tibetan character.
In Roman character.
80
U^
qg^'§' or ^^S^
gye-chu or gye-chii
W^'
th(im~pa.
81
L9
^^^^^^^'
gye chu gya-chi.
90
GO
S^^^'ov^^^^^^
gup'chu or gup-chit
si^'q-
thavi-pa.
91
Q9
^3'^s'5f^H
gup-chu Jco-chi.
100
^00
q*- or q^-^sq-q-
gya or gya-tham-pa.
101
9^9
q^-s^C-EIlSSIl'
gya-t'ang-chi.
200
^00
f-qj-
nyi-gya.
300
500
W^^
sum-gya.
400
^00
^^'^3
sKijp-gya.
500
Voo
fg-sij'
'^9<^jp-gy<^'
1,000
^OQQ
^C-gq]- or ^-
tong-thra or tong.
10,000
/^OOOO
0'
thri.
100,000
^coooo
<\^^-
bum.
82
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
English
Tibetan
figure.
Tibetan word.
figure.
In Tibetan character.
In Roman character.
3 ,000,000
/700OOOO
3'^-
cKe-wa.^
10,000,000
^0000000
^■v^-
sa-ya.
100,000,000
^00000000
t'ung-gyur.
Note -firstly that, in the case of tens and hundreds when
the smaller number follows the larger, addition is in-
dicated, e.g., fourteen = ten-four ; but when the larger
number follows the smaller, multiplication is indica-
ted, e.g., forty = four-ten. From the thousands up-
wards, when ^-^'•^^' is used, the smaller number
always follows the larger, e.g., ^C^'^cn'^IQ' tong-thra
sKi, FOUR THOUSAND, ^C3^'^^^'^^'^(^' toug-thra-
chi fang sKi, one thousand and four. But with ^^'
the multiplying number precedes, e.g.^ i^^'^CZ'^C^'^(oj*
sliip-tong fang sKi, routi thousand and reus.
Note secondly, that in the case of multiplication 2TI^^'
is spelt ^' 2TI^?J' is spelt ;^^' and q§" as the second
^ It is curious that Jaschke and Sarat Chandra Das in their
dictionaries give 9^'^' as ten millions and ^'"J* as one million, but
numerous Tibetans have been independently consulted and all agree
that ^'^' means one million and ^'«i' ten millions.
CHAPTER VIII. 83
part of a compound, the first part of which ends in a
consonant, is spelt ^'
Note thirdly, that the use of ^S^'q* after full tens is
optional. When used it impHes completion, e.g., ^^'
so
^'^^'^' truJc-chu tham-pa = sixty and no more.
^^'CJ' tham-pa, is also, but less commonly, used after
complete hundreds, e.g., ^'R^'^^'^' nyi-gya tham-
'pa, and when so used has a similar sense of com-
pletion.
^ote fourthly, the different conjunctions for each series
between 20 and 100, i.e., for the 20 series, for the 30
series, for the 40 series and so on.
Note fifthly, that we can add the usual plural form cB' to
BI ^3^1 3'^ I ^^^ ^'^' ^^^ the higher numbers to
make them plurals, but it is not necessary to do so.
ra' and 0.^^" may take ^^V also as a plural form.
cS' and 2^' seem to be used mainly in an indefinite
sense, e.g., I have several tens op thousands of
SHEEP. Cq'f^^'iq'cB'P'^n^'S^'^TS I nga-la Inlc thri-
tsho kha-she chi yd. There are two hundred thousand
SOLDIERS IN THAT country. W C^' ^^ ^'f^' ^^^' ^' f^^^^'
cn^^'y^^ ] lung-pa t'e-la ma-mi hum-nyi yd.
The noun qualified by a numeral remains in the singular ;
e.g., four ponies = Sl'R(^' not 5'($)'q^' (see also Chapter III,
para. 12).
84 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
3. Alphabetical Notation Tl'pf^^'^ja^J'Cnc;^' ka- khe nam-t'rang.
This is used for paging books, for numbering the different
volumes or parts in books, for Indices, etc. It is possible to-
count up to three hundred by it.
1 to 30 T[' p* ^1' C through the alphabet to t^'
31 „ 60 T|- p- ^- q- „ „ „ ., l^'
61 „ 90 rjr p- z^' ^' „ ., „ „ r^-
\o '>o -^ ^
91 ,, 120 T[- p- 5]' ^' „ „ „ ,, r^'
121 ,, 150 nj p afp r „ „ „ ,. i^-
151 „ 180 m; p' ^ C ,, „ „ „ J^'
r2^ r\ rx r2. Q,
181 „ 210 Tj- p- §]• £• „ „ „ „ l^-
n. rx r:^ (^ ^
211 „ 240 H]' ra- q- C' „ „ „ „ 13^-
^ ^ ?. 5^ a
No
N^ Ni ^
241 „ 270 ny p- CT]' c ,. „ „ „ l.'^'
ri Q. f2. Q^ <^
271 „ 300 Tp p- 5j^ C" „ - .. ,. ?^'
(^ Q, Q, (^ f2^
4. In counting most weights or measures and some divi-
sions of money ^\^,' fcang is used instead of 5715^' chi and ^
t'o instead of CTj^^ | nyi. Thus, ?|3;,*2I]C;' sor-Jcang, one finger-
breadth, ^JC^'X* sang-to, two sang {i.e., three rupees five-
annas), but gj^^'^t^'qi^^' gor-mo nyi, two rupees.
CHAPTER VIII. 85
5. In some dialects pfl]' khe is used as a score, thus po^'
sn-^^'^CW khe-nyi fang nga = forty-five (lit. tivo score and
Jive). This method of counting is not used in Lhasa where
pf3^' khe denotes a measure containing twenty g* tre (a mea-
sure varying in different districts, but often equal to about
one-fourteenth of a cubic foot).
6. Ordinals. — The first is translated by ^li'Z^ [ fang-fo.
All subsequent numbers by adding Z^' fa to the cardinal ; e.g.,
CTl^^'CJ' nyi-pa, the second, ^?I'§*^'^6^'^' sum-chu so-
chik-pa, THE THiRTY-EiRST. In reckoning Tibetan dates the
word (5^'C|' tshe-pa, date is used and is followed by the
cardinal number concerned, e.g., 3'^'^]'^^'^Q'cB^'^'^^5^'
da-wa nyi'pe tshe-pa sum, the third op the second month,
lit. the three-date of the second month. And (^^'CJ'm^^l'
^.s'/ie-pac/iiisusedfor ^/ifi^rs^, not (J^'^^'STC^'i]' tshe-pa fang -
-V CV Cv CV
po. Also ^^'^]^^[ nyer-chi or^'^'^^H]' nyi-shu chi is used
^ , Cv CV -V Cs
instead of ^'W^'g"cnOT' nyi-shu tsa-chi and ^^'^*?>^' nyer-nyi
Cv CV CV CV .
or -a'^'ZTl^^' nyi-shu nyi instead of ^'-^'g"^^^' nyi-shu
isa-nyi, and so on up to the twenty-ninth inclusive. The last
day is cn5;5;^'cnc^' nang-kang. If the month contains less or
more than thirty days, the omission or repetition of earlier
dates is prescribed. The last day is always sn(3k^'^C^' ] For
86 TIBETAN GR A MM All.
English dates the Hindustani word ^'^^' tarikh is used. A
farther difference is that ^'-^'§"^5^' nyi-shu tsa-chiy
^'4^'g'*^]^^' nyi-shu tsa-nyi, etc., are written for the 21st,
22nd, etc., instead of the forms noted above as used with
7. Conjunctive Numerals.—^' ka added to the cardi-
nal up to ten inclusive denotes conjunction. Thus, ^I'a^'^'
nyi-ka, both, ^5^^'TI' sum-ha, the three together, all three.
In the colloquial -S' cha often takes the place of T!' ka, e.g.,
^^^'^' nyi-cha, cn2^^'^' sum-cha, etc. Thus, C^^'^^'^'J^'
^•M'C^C J nye cKak-ya t'ruk-cha $im-yd,J have caught all
SIX robbers.
8. Distributive Numerals. — To express distrihutive nu-
merals, i.e.^ tivo at a time, five at a time, etc., repeat the cardi-
nal and add g^'<3J^ ! cKe-ne, Thus, bring them to me two
at A time. pt'^'^c;§^T^'^f^"^f^'9^''^^'^H^'"^l ^^^'''
tsho nge-tsa-la 7iyi nyi cKe-ne thri-sho. Bring them to me four-
teen AT A TIME. j^:;':^c:Q;^'^'^'^'^§'q^*q§'^^'g^'cij^'^gY
^^^] I khon-tsho nge-tsa-la mi chnp-sKi chup-sKi cKe-ne thri-
sho.
To express two each, etc., omit the ^^'(5^' c^e-?ie, e.g., give
EACH COOLY (load-carrier) TWO TRANG-KAS (a trangka = four
annas at present, 1917), '^'HfQ^R^'5^P<3;'2'5^r'^'Vf^'?'^'"
CHAPTKR Vlll. 87
^^^'^^^'^S I t'o-jpo khe-khen-hji mi re-re-la trang-ka nyi-
nyi tr'6. For one at a time, each or one each ^'^' re-re is used
instead of ^]5^'^5^'^ e.g., bring them to me one at a time^
P<^"^S\'S"'^'^'^'3^'<^^'^0^'*^ I ^^hon-tsho nge-tsa-la re-
re clie-ne thri-sho. Give each cooly one trang-ka ?^'2r
^B^'^P'^'^'^^'^'^'^'H'^'"^'"^'^! ^'^-^^ ^^he-khen mi-
hrang re-re-la trang-ka re-re trb. Where a cardinal numeral
has more than two syllables the whole numeral is not re-
peated. The last two syllables may be repeated, e.g., give
HIACH MAN THIRTY-FOUR RUPEES. •^''^''^'PJ'gl^'^'i^' ^ ^'^fqS''
^r^^'^I^ I mi re-re-la gor-mo sum- chu sop-sKi sop-sKi tro. Or
we may add ^' to the numeral instead of repeating, thus,
CV -V -V.
^''^•'^•f^'§|^'5^'^5J'^'^'q(^'^-^2^ I ,ni re-re-la gor-mo sum^
chu sop-sKi re trb.
9. Fractions.— Half is 2^'TI] chhe-ka, one and a half,
-V CV
IS expressed by gK*^C;'cr|^^' chhe-t'ang nyi, lit. with a half
{it is) two. Two AND A half = g^'^C'^^5^* chhe-t'ang sum,
CV -v
and so on. ^S^'^C;'g^'nr|' chil-tang chhe-Jm may be used
instead of 3S'S^'^*^^' chhe-t'ang nyi and so on, but the
latter forms are more common. One of a paik is UsI'^TI^cn'
, . -V-' CV
ya-chi, e.g., STTlX^'U^f^'^j^'qi^rn' ka-yb ya-chi, one cup of a
i ^' as a final consonant may always be Avritten in this way.
88 tibp:tan grammar.
PAIR. ^^^'(5' sum-chha, = a third and ^(eJ'cB' sKip-chha
= A roDRTHj and so on for other numbers ; but fractions be-
yond one-fourtli are not very much used in the colloquial
language. Thus, 5I^'Q^^T'ai*q]g3;j'^-q]^^-^Sfj'^'q'5j2^ |
ma-di nga-la sum-chha-nyi go-iva yd, I want two-thirds of
this butter. ^'Q.^*(3j^'^(e{*<5&'z:n^^'p'f^*$!^ | sha di-ne sKi-
chha-sum kho-la tr'6. Give him three quarters of this meat ;
re di ring-thung-la thru sKi fang thru chiJc-M sKip-chha-chi
yo-wa-re. This cotton cloth is 4J cubits in length.
10. Alternative Numbers. - Two or three, seven or eight,
etc., are expressed by the two numbers being placed one di-
^^^
rectly after the other. They may also be followed by ^5^'
chi- this is optional. Thus, ^C:'|3^'lj'Kfc:'aqp(3;'5Z7|-
sang-nyi mi yong-khen triilc dun chi y'6, mi re-re Jci ta nyi
sum thri lep-yong, there are six or seven men coming to-
morrow ; BACH MAN WILL BRING (lit. WILL ARRIVE BRINGING) '
TWO OR THREE PONIES.
11. Once, twice, thrice, etc., are rendered by ^C^^' theng
or (3^^' tshar, both of which mean time, joined to the cardinal
numeral. Once more is ^n'^C^C^^' ( or ^^' \ ^\^^\' ta-
rung theng-chi and so on, e.g. he has come here twice.
i To bring in the sense of to lead = «>§S|'y' thri-pa ; in the sense of
to carry =z <^^\'R' khyer-wa or <i,^^'^' khur-wa.
CHAPTER VIII.
89
P'^«^^' ( Q^^'^' ) ^C^'^^^'q^q^'?^;- ] kho de theng-nyi
lep-song. I have been to Lhasa five times and shall go
ONCE MORE, C:'^-^-a^'<^a;,-(^'q^q^-gc;' | s^'^C'^^'z^TjS?^-
Q^-T]*^'ysJ(3j [ nga hla-sa-la Uhar-nga lep-nyong ; t'a-rung
tshar-chi dro-Tii-yin.
12. The metliods of reckoning addition, subtraction, mul-
tiplication and division will clearly appear from the following
examples. Thus, ^"^^'^C^'qioi'q^'^'S^ I ^^^^ ^'^'^^^ ^^^ ^^^'
natru, if two and four are made, six. q§'<3J^'2:n^3^'Cl^(S*(3j'
q^TtS I chu-ne sum then-na diin, if three be drawn from ten,
SEVEN. ^m^^'f^'Oj'q^ I nyi nga-la chu, two to five, ten.
q^'^j-^i^'^^'q'cn^^'ai'qcc^'^r'q^S I chu-nyi tum-pu sum-la
tang-na sHi, if twelve be sent into three pieces, four.
Words.
Soldier = ^S^2:n'^' ma-mi.
Behind = ^q'0^' gyap-la-
Wall = gq|'q' tsiJc'pa.
That... over there (indicating
a place in sight) = S}'^1'
pha-gi.
Jong- pen, ^ e. Official in charge
of a district = gc:'^q(3j'
Jong-pen. He lives in a
fort, called the Jong ( gC^")
built strongly with thick
walls on a hill or ridge ris-
ing a little above the sur-
rounding plain or valley.
To come, arrive, hon. =
qq'q* phep-pa.
90
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Wages = g]' la.
Boot (of Tibetan manufac-
ture). = gS^'pzm* hJam-Jiho-
Boot (of English or Indian
manufacture) = Q.^'^'
jti'-ta, Hin.
Is lost (lit. having been lost,
is not) = q§^^'<3;^^'^-
Q^^2:n' la-ne min-dn.
Finger- breadth = ^^' sor.
Span (from the tip of the-
thumb to the tip of the
middle finger when extend-
ed) = ^^' tho.
Cubit (from the point of the
elbow to the tip of tho
middle finger) = ra' thru.
Day = ^'^' nyi-ma.
New := ^l^^'Il]' sa-jpa.
New year = cq'cn^^* lo sa.
Exercise No. 13.
1383. ^5^5 1
One thousand three hundred and eighty-three. %'^'gCT]*
^S^-2^C:'g5q'q J'qg2^'g-^'q|^5^ | trong-thra chi tang
sum-gya gye-chu gya-sum.
There are thirty or forty Tibetan soldiers behind that wall
over there. q'^j'I^Tj'qo^ gq-q-qi^'qq^'^5^q^-^'^^-
§'^3'^§'^^'^'^^ I fha-gi tsiJc-pe gyap-la pd-pe ma-
mi sum-chu ship-chu yo-wa-re.
The Jong-pen will arrive here on the twenty-fifth, ^'^'f^"
(^^•g-) 0\'^^^' {^^) gt'^qS^'^q-^C;' I nyi-
shu nga-la de Jong-peyi phe-yong.
CHAPTP]K VIll. 91
The Jong-pen will arrive here on tlio twenty-fifth of the
sixth month. =-q-5q|'q§^-^'^-(g'q'gc:'S(^aj'5^2^^'
S^^'w^C^' I da-iva trulc-pe nyi-shu nga-la Jong -pen de
yhe-yong.
The Jong-pen will arrive here on the twenty-fifth of June.
da truJc-pe nyi-shu nga-la Jong -pen de phe~yony.
Both men are here. 5^'2qi<?,^Tn'^c:^'y^^ | mi nyi-ka de yb.
They ask (lit. request^ " please give '^) one and a half rupees
each as wages. ^'^'^§^'^C;'cr]^^'cr]|^'^(3^C;°
3;q]^'q]<3:[;*«'qn'ar cn I la gor-mo chhe-tang nyi-nyi
nang-ro-nang sKu-M-du.
Give them one rupee each {lit. give each man one rupee).
S^'-^'^'OJ'S^'Sf ^'^'S^ I mi re-re-la gor-mo re-re tr'6.
One boot of this pair is lost. g5^'p^'Q^^^'y^'^S^'^§^^'
(3J^'^'Cl^2T| I hlam-kho di-i ya-chi la-ne min-du.
Three and five are eight. 2T|^5^'^C:'fg'2^'<^''^g^ I ""^^'^^ ^^^^^
nga cKe-na gye.
Seven from nine leaves two. ^2^'(5;^'^^<3v"Q^^(^'<3j'^^^ j
gu-ne diin theii-na nyi.
Seven times two are fourteen. q^(3;'^l^^J'f2^'^^'^(^ [ diin
nyi-la chup-sKi.
92 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Five into fifteen is three. q^fg-^g^'g'tg'q'qt^r^j'^I^^I f
chb-nga fum-pu nga-la tang-na sum.
Ten finger-breadths make one span. ^^'^CQ^'^^''^§'y^^'
^*^S I ^^^ Jcang-la sor chu yo-wa-re.
Two spans make one cubit. [g'23nc;'a^'5^^' ^'1^^"^!'^^]
thru Icang-la tho to yo-wa-re.
Exercise No. 14.
Four into twenty-four is six. Five from thirteen leaves
eight. 28,407. Twenty-eight thousand four hundred and
seven. Bring an armful of wood. Five or six new traders
are arriving daily (= each day) at Kalimpong. When the
New Year is over larger numbers (= more) will come
(= arrive).
CHAPTER IX.
Peonodns.
1. Pronouns are, generally speakings declined in the
same way as nouns. Exceptions to this general rule will be
noted below under the pronouns concerned.
*2. Personal Pronouns* — These are C^' ^iga or C^'^C^*
nga-rang, I ; I^^' khy'6 or [JS'^^' khyo-ravgyTHOU, you; p'
kho, or p'^^C kho-rang, he; ^' wo^, she ; e.g.y will you stay
HERE TO-MORROW ? H^' ^C ^^' ^^^'S^' ^' V^S!^' ^^ ] hhyo
sang-nyi de do-kyi yim-'pe ? The system of honorific
language in Tibetan is dealt with below in Chapter XIII, but
here it must be briefly noted that there is a separate class
of words which must be used in reference to a person of good
position, both when speaking to and when speaking of such
person. Not to do so will lay the student open to the
charge of speaking what is known in India as ^^ Cooly
language.'^ Even if his rudeness is known to be merely the
result of ignorance, every sentence he utters will jar upon
the person he addresses.
3. As regards personal pronouns the ordinary honorific
form for thou, you is R^' hhye or R^'^C khye-rang and for
HE or SHE pi;' lihong. Of course the first person has no honor-
ific form ; nor in the Lhasa colloquial language are any
other forms used for it except Z.' ng a or C^'-^C nga-rang ;
94 TIBETAN GKAMMAll
though in the Tsang colloquial ^^^' da is used in the depre-
catory sense of " your humble servant/' and in letter-writing
in Lhasa and elsewhere ^^^' du and T!^5J thren and other
terms are used in the same sense. For Tibetan gentlemen
of the higiier ranks a higher form of honorific should be em-
ployed, namely ^'^(«j^^' htt-sho, or ^'STC;^' ku-7igd, the
meaning of which corresponds somewhat to the English sir,
e.g., WILL YOU STAY HERE TO-MORROW, SiR ? ^'^(oj^^'^C^'
^^'3^^^'^(^^^'2T]^(3j'C;^R^]'§j'y^<3;'q;^ | kusho sang-nyi de
sKu-den ja-Tii yim-fe? For Tibetan ladies '^^'^J '^(?i^^'
cham-ku-sho is used. These latter are used as honorifics for
YOU, HE or SHE ; i.e., both when speaking to or of a person.
The secular heads of the Tibetan Government, i.e. Lon-chhens
and Sha-pes should be addressed by their titles, i.e., S(3J'cB(9J'
lon-chhen and 2^'2rq^'«*q' sa-ivang chhem-po, respectively,
the latter being the Sha-pe's honorific designation. The wives
of these high ministers are addressed as 9^'^^'^ '^(oj^^' hla-
cham kusho. Similarly, for a high Lama ^'^3^^''^<3i*^'(^'
kusho rim-po-chhe, precious Sir ! and for a nun of high posi-
tion I'q^a^'^'qj^^' je-tsun kusho should be employed,
e.g., WILL YOU (addressing a nun of high rank) stay herb to-
morrow ? |'q^3;v^-qr]^q|^-2^C:-^3^-5j:^^-q«q|^.q|:^3^-Q^^q|.
^*ys^(3^'q^ I je-tsiin kusho sang-nyi de sKu-denj'a-ki yim-jie ?
CHAPTER IX. 95
If the Lama be an avatar, i.e., an incarnation of Buddha, of
whom there are several hundreds in Tibet, ^'^(^^^'^^'^ '
ku-sho trii-kn should be used. |]^*^' tril-ku means incar-
nation.
4. As regards declension it should be noted that S^ |
khyo p' kho and 5]' mo in addition to making theii-
genitive and instrumental singular according to the rules of
declension for nouns, also take ^f^' re for the genitive and
•s;^' re for the instrumental case, e.g., R^*^^' khy'6-re or
S^'S' ^^'hyd-kyi ; ^^' kho or p'-^^' kho-re. Again when
personal pronouns are used in a plural sense, their plural
forms are, as a rule, used even though the sense of plurality
is clear from the context. On this point also they differ
from nouns (see Cap. Ill, para. 12). Thus, ^'-^CcB'Qw^'
^'^^ I ^'^"'''^'^9' chhum-hi la tshong-pa mang-fo yo-wa-re, sang-
nyi khon-fsho gang~kha jpha-ri-la dro-Hi-re, there is a large
NUMBER OF TRADERS AT ChUMBI TQ-DAY ; THEY WILL ALL GO
TO Phari TO-MORROW. When joined to numerals, however,
the plural form is not used, e.g., Q'cnft^' nga-nyi, we two.
The plural of ^'^3^^' ku-sho and of S'^C^^' hu-ngb may
either be formed with ^' tsho in the ordinary way or by
3,didi\x\g^^^\^' hlen-gye ; e.^., ^'ZTI^cn^'gfS'qi^' ku-sho hlen-
96 TIBETAN GhAMMAR.
gye. The latter form gives a somewhat higher honorific-
than the former.
5. The pronoun it, when used in the nominative or accusa^
tive case, is not translated into Tibetan, e.g.^ R^'R'^'^'^^ T
C^'^^^*J:j"y^(3J I torn fe Ica-pa yd ? nge se-pa yin, where is
THAT BEAR? I HAVE KILLED IT. But ^C§IC^'^S'^^ 1 ^^'
y^QJ'^]'§!C^'m'2^5^'(5^'^'Q.^^] I sMng-dong di re, t'e-'i ye-ga
gang-kha che ne min-dti, this is the tree ; its branches
HAVE ALL been LOPPED OFF (lit. HAVING BEEN LOPPED, ARE NOt).
6. Any personal pronoun will usually be omitted, if its
omission does not cause any ambiguity in the sentence, e.g.,
t'e-ring nga de do-kyi-yin sang-nyi dro-Hi-yin. I will stay
HERE TO-DAY ; I SHALL GO TO-MORROW.
7. Possessive Pronouns* — The Possessive Pronoun is
expressed by the genitive of the Personal Pronoun, e.g.,
C;d' nge my, mine ; ra^'^Q^' khyo-re RS'']]' khyo-kyi, your,
YOURS ; p 0^' kho p'-^f^' kho-re, his. ^ Q^' mo, 5^'^Q^'
O^ Cv -^
mo-re, her, hers. Thus, Ci^r'C^Q'F'^;,^ | di nge ta re, this
IS MY HORSE ; g'Q.^'C^Q^'-s^^ I ta di nge re, this horse is mink ;
-V—' ~s Ov "s ~^ •^,«— '
P^''^a'^'5^^Q'Q.p^'^cn I khyo-re men-da khe-sho, bring
YOUR gun.
CHAPTER IX. 97
8, Reflective Pronouns*— Myself, yourself, etc., are ex-
pressed by ^C:' rang, e.g., g5^*5;^-^'Q^^-g^-3j-^C;'q'g5^-
{injurij) g^'C^C^" | khyo-re t'en-dra cKe-na rang-la hydn
cKe-yoiig. If you act in that way yoq will hurt yourself.
^C^'2T1' rang-gi and ^*^ Q^' .so-so, my own, your own, etc., have
the meaning of apna in Hindustani. Thus, ^'^'^^'^C^'
2T^'^'y^^]'^A2^'y^5k'^^3^^'CI'■^^ l mi so-so rang-gi ta yalc-sho
yin sam-fa-re. Each man thought his own pony the best.
This might also be rendered ^'5,'?;^'^?f ^'S-ysJcn'^'^^a;*
^^SJ^'CJ'^,^ J mi re-re so-so ta yalc-sho yin sam-'pa-re.
9. Other meanings of ^C connected with the above mean-
ing of SELF are shown in the following examples : —
Yes. It is quite so. fl^^rTl^'^'^'-^C^^ [ la t'a-Jca rang re.
This is really difficult. Q^^'2s^Q^-aj^'P^'^=T|"ls^'^C:'Q^2;^SI] |
di ka-le khaJc-thalc-chho rang du.
Your mere coming here has done good, [lit.) by your mere com-
ing here good has resulted. R^'-^C^'^^^' (Q^S'^')
3^C;'2:i''^C:'CT]^'y^27|''Hf ^C;' | khyo-rang de yong-nga
rang-gi yalc-po cKung.
^C is often also used with negatives in the sense of
very, e.g. —
Do not drink very much beer. (3BC^C;'"^^C;'5^'(^^igc;* [ chhang
mang-fo rang ma-tliung.
98 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
10. Reciprocal Pronouns. — Each other, oxe another,
are expressed hj ^^^^]^'^^^^\' chi-chi, e.g., ^^ZJ^'^^^V^]^:^'
^1^2^'Klf C;^'E;' (^'j ^^1 Jcho-rang-tsho chiJc-lci-chi dnny-
nga-rc, they beat each other. (Lit. hy one to one, they
heat).
11. Demonstrative Pronouns, — This is rendered by
CU\' di and that by ^' te, but when either this or that refers
to a noun previously mentioned ^' t'e is used, e.g., ^^^
^'■^S 1 ^^ yaJc-'po re, this one (previously mentioned) is good.
Both Q>^' and ST* follow the noun or adjective which they
qualify, and take the case-inflection instead of the noun or
adjective. They are also used by themselves, apart from
nouns, e.g., the example just given, and Q^'C^Q.'ys|(3; ! di nge
yin, this is mine.
12. Other demonstrative pronouns in common use are
Qc'i^C;' di-rang, this very, ^'^C t'e-mng, that very, emphatic
forms of this and that respectively, also ^'^* ta-Ka and
Jn'STI'^C t'a-Jca-rany, with the same meaning ; e.g., Is this
the very man that I SAW YESTERDAY? S^'Q^^'p^'^'C^^'^I^C^'C^'
(i^') ^'-^C^'-^^'^^ I "^"^i dihhe-sa ngt' thong-nga t'e-rang re-
pe ? Yes, it is the very same. (^^n^'^'^j'^C'^^ ] l(i ta-Ha-
rang re. Also, y^'^1* ya-gi,i:R\T up there, ^W ma-gi, that
CHAPTER IX. 99
DOWN THEHEj and 5:1'^' pha-gi, that over there, that yonder ;
these latter three forms being used with or without ^' ^s
per the following examples. C^'^'lJ'^'cB'^^'Kfc^'^j'Q^srz^ |
ya-gi mi t'en-tsho ma yong-gi-du, those men up there are com-
ING DOWN. Q^^'C;Q^'(5^'^'y^(3J ] q'^TI'p Q^*-^^ I di nge sKa-mo
yin ; ]jha-gi kho re, this is my hat; that one over there
IS his.
Also f2.^'Q.^* din-dra, op this kind, like this and ^'Q.^'
ten-dra, of that kind, like that. ^'G]2T|' /^'Oicnx Qc'QSn*
^(^C^'^'JAJ^'i^^ [ cha-la din-dra t-s'hong-gyu yo-jje, have you
oot things of this kind for sale ? Q.S'Qi5' ^^^^ ^^^ *^^ sense
or WHAT m interjections, e.g., what a cold day ! ^^'f^5^'
^(X^'^C^'C^'dJ I din-dre nam frang-nga-la ! The same sense
may also be expressed without ^S*^5' ^'9"> ^^^^"^ ^ largk
horse ! £'^'cB'^'f3^' i^ i'^ chhe-a-la !
13. As with the personal pronouns, so also Q^^' di and
^' t'e usually take their plural forms, even when the sense is
clear from the context, e.g., ^'^'(^'||Q'P'^^'3^' (3^')I
mi t'en-tsho gang-kha sho cKi, call (lit. make come) all those
men. But not when joined to numerals, e.g., ^'K'^'h^]'^^'
3^' OS') I '"^^ tenyi sho cUi, call those two men.
100 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
14. Relative Pronouns, — Except ^\'^' Jca-re and ^\Zi'
Hangy what, avhich relative pronouns are not used. ^1'^'
is used more often than ^}p in the Lhasa colloquial lan-
guage. The relative clauses must be expressed by participial
clauses, in which 27]'^' or ^IC^' may be used, but more often
are not used. The participle is treated as an adjective,
being put in the genitive, if it precedes the noun, and if it
follows the noun, taking the case-inflection of the latter.
15. Thus, 1-c;^'^"^r^'^'^'^c:'(=&^''^' (^•) ^s^i
t're nge thong-nga t'e tsong tshar-ra re, the mule, which
I SAW, HAS BEEN SOLD. Again, I3S''^^'|3''^'^'^'^'^P^'^'
C^*33I'y^^ I Jihyo-re khyi hu-ma kii-khen fe nge sim-yb.
I HAVE CAUGHT THE MAN WHO STOLE YOUR DOG. (Lit. I have
caught the-your-dog-stealer) , Again, g'^'<3j^'y\TCi;'?jra(5*^"
^5^S^'5^'^'($)'I;J^'Q^cn'^Q' I hla-sa ne yong-hhen-Hyi ma-mi
t'en-tsho pha lolc-song. The soldiers who came from Lhasa
HAVE GONE BACK THERE. (Lit. the-from-Lhasa-coming soldiers^
have gone hack there). Once more, ^^'^Q^'^^^'^^'g'^'Cl*
^3^'^'^'^(oj^''3(^'^'^^^ I pb-j^e ma-mi fsifc-pa so-pa fe
sKilc-ne min-du. The wall which was built by Tibetan
soldiers has been demolished. (Lit. the-hy-the-Tibetans-
huilt wall having been demolished, is not). The distinction
CHAPTER IX. 101
between the participles in ^p(3J* k^,ien ahH ^' jpa respectively
has been noted above in Cap YI, para- 19.
16. Correlative Pronouns. — ^I who, you who, he who,
WHOEVER, THAT WHICH, WHAT, WHATEVER, etc._, are rendered
either by the Agentive Participles, or by the interrogative
pronoun with the conditional tense (Chap. VI, para. 15)
followed by C^C or [T]C" or by both methods combined,
or finally by using a causative sentence with ^C* as, be-
cause, e.g. —
i WHO HAVE BEEN THERE, KNOW THIS. C^'5;J'^'^^^'gC^'^C^'C^'
^^'!I]*^S 1 ^^^^ pha-gi lep nyong-tsang nge shing-
gi yd.
He who brought the letter yesterday is my man. p^'^'y^'
khe yong-ngen t'e nge mi yin
Listen to what {i.e., that which) I say. C^2^'C^^'CJ'^*^(3J |
nge lap-pa t'e nyon.
Whoever comes, must come to-day. :^r^C^'<3\'y^C;'^''=^C*yvIC
^STI^'J^'^^ I sii yoiig-na-yang te-ring yong go-tca-re.
Whoever is afraid, may stay here. ^'(S^^'Cc?;' (^P*^')
ngen yo-na-yang de de-chho-M-re.
17. Interrogative Pronouns* — These are ^' .'^u, who ?
102 TIBETAN GKAMMAR.
ZT|'5,' Z:a-/v^and ]qs& otei .^C' ^'a7zgf), what ? which ? CT]'^]'
Ita-lii, WHiaH O^.THEM ?; WHiCH OF THESE ? WHICH OF THOSE ?
cn'C 2n:5s" K'^n-dre, of what kind ? Examples of their use are
as follow: f^^'^5^'^'^^ I disu tare. 'or cjQ^'^'^^]tad{
sU re ? WHOSE pony is this ? g^'5,c;^'5^£:'a|'CT|'5;'i^-^'5^s^ J
khyo-re ming-la Ica-re si-Jcyi-yd ? what is your name f
(Lit. WHAT is said to youb. name ?), ^C^^'^'f^5^'^'^'cr|'5;^ [
Gang-tok-lii lang-lm Jca-fii re, which of these roads is the
one to Gangtok. =>^'Sf^'g2^'eT|'Q^5^'Q^2:^|' fa-lo ton-tho
Ican-dre du, what are the crops like this year .' £'Q^^'^'
(35^*^0. 'c'27]'^''^^ I fa di~tsho ne nge ta fca-M re, w^hich of
these ponies is mine ? The interrogative form of the verb
may also be used, e.g., g^-^Q^'l|rq-q]-^'i^'g*D;ji^'q|
Jihyo-re ming la Jca-re si-Jci yo-pa ? Both ^' and ^^^ are
declined in the singular, e.g., Os^^^^'^B^'^'^K^ di Ha-
re s'6-pa re ? of what substance is this made ? (Lit. from
what has this been madp] ?) Their plurals are formed by
repeating them once; e.g., ^' (c5') f^^'^'c5'^'^'^'5,'5,S^ f
cha-la ten-tsho Ica-re Ha-re re ? what are those things t
5^'r*^'^'^';^r I ^^^ t'en-tsho sii-su re ? who are those men l
OJ\^^^^'^\^^'^B^'^^^ \ di Ha-re Jca-re so-pa re ? of
what substances is this made ? It will be noticed from the
above examples that the interrogative pronoun stands in the
sentence immediately before the verb, except when in the
CHAPTER IX. 103
genitive, in which latter case it may precede the noun which
it qualifies. Which of you will go with me ? C^C^'3^^^'
S'BS'^'^'^^'^'^*^ 1 '^'^9'^*' i^^^'W ''W^^^^^'^^^ Ji'hydn-tsho sic dro-
IH-yin. Who will show me the road ? C^'ClJ'fl^^' T|' ^^'^(5*
3'^^ I '^^9^'^^ lang-ka m ton-Hyl-re.
18. Indefinite Pronouns^ — Among these we find the
following in frequent use.
^'^ I re-re, ^ | re, ^'^ | so-so, each.
<^C^ I tshang-ma, ^^^'Z^ | tharii-che, giQ'pI |
gang-kha, all, every.
p'^^ I kha-she, some.
^'l^Cj *;^^-//a?i^, WHOEVER.
?^'y^C' 1 su-yang, with a negative == nobody.
^1'^ ^C^' I Ha-re ' ' ' yang, with the verb in the
conditional tense intervening, anything that,
WHATEVER.
cn';^'«cn y^C kare-sKiJc ' • ' ' yang, anything
that, whatever. The addition of the (5j^' makes
the meaning more emphatic.
qi-qiQ^' ( ZTlC^'UsJC^' \ Jca-lce (with a negative) nothing.
^"S^'y^C chilc-yang, with a negative = lit. not even
one, i.e., NOBODY AT ALL, NOTHING AT ALL.
^(aaj'qi slie7n-pa,V^^'!:]] y ern~pa, OTHEH.
104 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
zn(a(3;'CJ'2TI5cn' sK^m-pa cJii, y^<5\'i^'2Tl^m' yem-jpa ch%
ANOTHER,
^6^'^^^' <chi-chi, ONE ANOTHER, EACH OTHER.
^]6^'^ ] Chilc-po, THE ONLY, THE SOLE.
^6^'^ I chiJc-pa, THE SAME.
^'^5^'^ I na-chilc'pa, different, various.
qi^cn-y^r* ! chiJc-yang, with a negative not even one,
NOT A SINGLE ONE.
Others will be found in the Dictionary and, bein^ used in
an ordinary way, present no difficulty. Indefinite pronouns
can be employed either with nouns or alone.
19. The following examples will show how the above are
used : —
Some men have arrived, ^'p'^^'^gji^^'ac^' j Qni kha-she
lep-cKung.
Give each man one rupee. ^'^'^'(^'^^'^'^'-^'^I^'^A^ |
mi re-re-la gor-mo re-re tro-sho.
Any body who goes will die. ^'gc^'^i'y^C^' ( or ^'g^^J'dJ^' )
CV CV WN
^A'^l'^^l su chMn-na-yang ioT su chhin-ne) shi-M-re.
There is nobody at Kampa Jong now-a-days. ^'^C^CZ'
^^5J'^'gC'C^•;^•y^[C^•^•Q.^^l[^^e-r^?^^-6.'a?^(/ kam-pa dzong-
la su-yaiig min-du.
Burn anything that is in this house. pC^' Q^^Ci '(SjC^'Q^'^]'^*
CHAPTER IX. 105
(a,S=T3i'tMC:' (or q|-5,-a^^=r]-3i^-) gq|- (tra,^=I]-,
^ZTI I khang-pa di-'t nang-la Hare dulc-na-yang (Jca-rn
diiJc-ne) tra-sho.
There is nothing in it. $^'(3^C;'q'27|-Z7]5^' ( ^jr^^C:" ) ISCO^^^ |
te-'i nang-la lea-Ice min-du.
CVCv
There is not a single person in this house. pc^'^'Q^^Q^'
^C^'(l|'^'27|5cn'yqC^'y^C'q'3;|'2;^r I khang-fa di-l nang-la
mi cMU-yang yo-ica ma-re.
Call another servant. ^]55^'qr ^(^-^^ ' ^ ' ^^^ ' "^ ' 3^'
/ qC' \ I yoJc-^o sKem-pa-chi s-ho cHi.
The others are all absent. 2q[](oj'3^'CJ'^C:' pq^^'^' (^^^^ |
sKem-pa gang-kha de min-du.
This servant does not know the work ; call another one.
so
"^^'5^' ( 9^' ) I yoU-po di le-ka shing-gi min-du ;
sKem-pa-chi sho cKi.
Boys, do not beat each other ! q'S^'^^'qiOT'^^'^S^'f^'^'
^C^'(oj^[ pu-gii tsho chiJc-Jci chiJc-la ma-dung -sKi.
Out of ten men I am the only one left. ^' ^§^ ^'2^'^^'
C;'qfi^cn'q'aj;^'qQ' j mi chii kyi-ne nga chiJc-po le-
cHung.
Tho religions of China and Tibet are the same, g'-^^
106
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
^^^'^'cS^'l^^^'^^^'^*'^^ I gya-po nyi-kyi chho-
lu chiJc~pa re.
Various kinds of people come together in this bazaar. \RW
■so
la mi-na mi-chi1i-j)a mang-po chom-kyi-diu
There is not even one with whom I am acquainted. C^'C
•V CV cv
^^•q'CIjOT'y^C^'^'Q^^^ I ngF ngo-shem jm chiJc-yang
7nin-d7i.
WOEDS.
To say, tell, hon.= ^^C ' ^ '
simg-iva.
Syce, groom = ^q^ ' s^qSj '
chhiJc-pon.
Ghoom, a village near Dar-
jeeling = CT^-q'^' Jcum-
pa-ri.
Horse, /io?i.= ^qfj-q (§q^'
q' \ chhilt-pa.
To ride = (5j(3;'q' sKom-pa,
To ride, hon. = O^q ' q *
chhip-pa.
Behind = ^®2:n'a|' sKu-la.
To have a fight with = qf C"
^^'q^'q* dung-re cKe-pa.
To be d runk = ^'ql'q |
^'qS'q^'q | ra-si-wa, rap-
si cHe-ya.
rna-
ExERCisE No. 15.
Whose pony is that down there? 5^'^'^5^'S'^^ |
gi sU ta re ?
Please tell your syce to take both ponies to Ghoom. S^'
CHAPTEU IX. 107
<pdn la chhiJc-pa nyi-ka Hum-fa-ri la thri-song sung-
ro-nang.
We (two) have each ridden ponies to Darjeeling {lit. have
gone riding, etc.). r^^^^'^^' ( ^q^' ) ^'^Sq^'
(3j^"r ' g'3]C^'f^'5;jq^'q'ys[<3j ] nga-nyi chhifo-pa cmp-ne
Dor-je-ling-la phe-pa-yiri.
[Note that the honorific forms are employed in deference
to the person who has ridden with me.]
Those are the traders who have come from Lhasa, g'^**^^'
2^C:'5^p<3j'^''^::'q'^'^^^ [ hlasa ne yong-khen-Hyi
tshong-pa t'en-tsho re.
The others are coming behind. Z7|(oi(5'q'cB'^^^'f^"^^k'^'
y^^'ZlJ'^:,^ I sKvm-'pa fsho sKif^-la yong-M yo-wa-re.
^ — ^
They have been fighting with each other on the way. p* c^^°
tsho lang-ka-la chiJs-lii-chi dung-re cKe-pa-re.
Probably tliey were all drunk. p^^||C;' p^' ^' ql' ^^' ^'
y^(5;'Q.2:n ] l-hon-tsho gang-hhe rap-si cKe-pa yiu-tro.
Exercise No. 16.
What is the name of the trader who came yesterday ?
What things has he got ? This is the very man that stole my
pony. Nobody has arrived to-day. Those who come to-
morrow will stay some days.
CHAPTER X.
Adverbs.
1. Adverbs are formed in three ways, namely : —
(a) Primitive, such as ^'^' t'an-da, noav, C^^'^C lam-sang,
AT ONCE and ykJC^'^^' yang-kyar^ again. Most adverbs of
time belong to this form.
(b) Those formed from nouns or pronouns, such as Qs:'^^*
di-ne, from here (lit. from this) ; p'^i?^' kha-ne, orally (lit.
from mouth) ; and ^^'flj' gyap-la, behind (lit. at the back).
Many adverbs of place are formed in this way.
(c) Those formed from adjectives, as in English quick,
quickly, etc. These in colloquial Tibetan take the form either
of the adjective itself or of the adjective with fl^'S^' clie-
ne added. Thus : S^^^^'^'qi^ | gyok-po gyu, go quickly ;
kham-chhii di tha-chb-pa-naug, decide this case (law-suit)
fairly.
2. Adverbs used in the ordinary way require no special
mention here ; they will be found in the Dictionary. Those
which are formed or used in peculiar ways will now be
noticed. Adverbs always precede the verb in a sentence.
Those used interrogatively stand immediately before the
CHAPTER X. 109
verb in most cases, e.g., 5^'^'($^'(^^^ ! mi Jca-tsho du ? how
MANY MEN ARE HERE ?
3. («) About, some, s=^' ( ^^' ) t-^a, but ^\^^V is some-
times added. Thus, ^'q^'^' ( ^^'\ 271 ^qi i ')ai chu-tsa chi,
ABOUT TEN MEN.
(b) Even, not even. V^ZJ yang = even, also, and when
accompanied by a negative means not even and is used as in
the following examples : p'(5B^'^'5^^^' ^^' y^C^'w^^' rn-^-
Q^^l 1 hhon-tsho men-da gya-yang shing-gi min-du. They
DO NOT even know HOW TO FIRE A GUN. The emphasis is on
the word /re ^^' (gya) which is immediately followed by
LVJC^' yang in the Tibetan sentence.
(c) Here = ?^i^^- {^^ ) de ; there = ^:^' (^'5') ^^-
But instead of ^^' ( ^'^' ) t'e S;J'^' fha-gi, over there is fre-
quently used. And if the here or the there is higher up or
lower down than the person speaking y^'^* y(^-gh up
here, up there, or S^'^V ma-gi, down here, down there
should be employed. Thus, S^'CnS^'C^'^'y^^ | mi-cht ya-
^^ I/O, there ISA MAN THERE (i.e., higher tqy). Similarly with
verbs of coming or going to or from Tibet, we should say
" he is coming down from Tibet " ; he is going wp to Tibet."
Thus : afc:'q-^qs^'ai'y^^-3rcTj-cq- (q-j ^:^[ tshong-pa-fsho
pii-la ya loJc-Jca-re. the traders have gone back (up) to Tibet.
110 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
{d) How FAR. This is rendered by i^^iTl'^C'^C^'^]'^^ [ lit.
HOW MUCH DISTANCE, e.g., jj^'^S^'g^q'S'-^'t^j^'^^'^^^'^C;.
cn*(£2s*y^^| hhyo-re lung-pa hla-sa-ne tha-ring-thung Ka-tsho-
y'6 ? How FAR IS YOUR COUNTRY FROM LhASA ?
(e) How long, i.e., how many days, months, years, etc., is
rendered thus : how^ many months is it since you came ? rSk'
■^C;'y^C;'(3^^'^'^'^'^^'^C:' | Biyo-rang yong-ne da-iva Jca-
tsh'6 song ? You having come how many months have
GONE ?
(/) How much ? How many ? = ^'(^^' e.g., how many men
are THERE ? ^'^'-^S'^^^l mi Jca-tsho-du ? But in refer-
ring to the time of day ^'^S' corresponds to what p.g.,
WHAT o'clock is IT ? ^'^S'^'^^'-^S | chhu-tsho Jca-tsho re.
(g) Much, many (S*q'^C^' | sKe-po-rang ^C'^'-^C^' mang-
po-rang. Used only with a negative in the sense of not much,
NOT MANY. Thus, (^^q's^j?^^' ( o^^'o^' ) pc^'q'sirq^^c:-
5^ '0.^^11 lung-pa de hhang-pa mang-po -rang min-du, there
ARE NOT MANY HOUSES IN THIS TRACT OF COUNTRY.
Qi) Not at all, never is translated by a negative accom-
panied by §"<3\^' tsa-7ie or ^'(3j^ [ ma-ne. Thus R^'S"<5j^'
( or 5^'(3J^' ) y^I^'^'^^'f^S^ I di tsa-ne yali-po min-du, this
CHAPTER X. Ill
IS NOT AT ALL GOOD. C:^'^^'§"(3:^'a•5^•gC:' ] nge sha tsa-ne sa
ma nyong. 1 have never eaten meat. Also by ^^ or 5^*5:'
followed by a negative, e.g., ^^^'^l^^r^^'^'\^ | ^^^-fe yo-ica-
ma-re, there are none at all. ^^^' is more emphatic than
({) Op course— but, indeed — but. These have been dealt
with Tinder the verb (Chap. VII, para. 23).
(y) Only, entirely, all, are often translated by siCI'^cn'
which immediately precedes the verb, f\g., 5^'^A'^^*^^ |
mi sha-ta re, there are men only ; (i.e., there are no animals,
etc.) ^' ((S') q2T]'a^^''^'y^q]''Hf si:|'2^q]'a^2^q] I chn-ia dUsho
yak-fo sha-ta die, these things are all good ; (i.e., there are
no had things among them).
{k) So, so much is often rendered by Q^^s'Q^^' lit. this kind
or by ^'0^5^' lit. of that kind, e.g., ^^'<S<3j'q'a^^'f^5'^'gCT| [
ke chhem-fo din-dra ma-gya. Do not talk loudly, do not
MAKE such a noise TALKING.
{I) Too is expressed by ^2:T1'C]' trak-pa, joined as a verb
to the root of the adjective concerned, e.g., ^P^'^^'^^''^C^'
5^'^' (^') ^S 1 khar-yyic di ring t'nik-ka re, this
STICK IS TOO LONG. Cip^'CT27]' = 6'^/c/v ; ^Zi'^' = long.
112 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
(?/i) Very may be expressed b}^ ^'-SC ha-chang or by
qqi'^r* fhaJc-chho added to the root of the adjective, or in
some cases by repeating the adjective once in a raised tone
of voice. Thus, very great may be expressed by ^'^C^'cS^'^'
ha-chang chhem-'po or by cB'^^'cB^' chhe-thaJc-chJid or by
^5j'^'cB'3\*^ I chhem-po chhem-'po. Here, however, it should
be noticed that <5CcBC chhung-chhung means simply small ;
^Z^^Zs' thung-thung, ^-i^owi: ', ^C^'^C nyung-nyung, few and
SO with a few others= In these latter very is not implied.
The method of expressing very by raising the tone of the
voice is found also in Nepalese (Khas-kura), with which
Tibetan has a few grammatical affinities.
(?i) Why. This is frequently rendered by 271C;*Q4' lit. for
WHAT, e.g., ^•p^'^'2T]C:'a|'^'27:;-C:" khyu khe-sa Hang-la
ma yong nga ? why did you not come yesterday ? or by
turning the sentence; thus, R^'R^'^'^'y^Cqa '^^ 2n27]'
^'•^'■^^ I hhyo khe-sa ma yong-nge ton-t'a ka-re re? {Lit.
AVHAT IS the meaning OF YOUR NOT COMING YESTERDAY ?)
4. The treatment of negatives has been explained when
dealing with verbs (see Cap. Y, para. 3, Cap. VJ, para. 13,
and Cap. VII, paras. 1 and 2), and need not be repeated
here.
CHAPTER X,
113
Words.
Far off = ^^'-^C^'^'^/iii ring-
po.
Animal = ^^^''5<5j' sem-
chen.
Field glasses; {lit. distance
glass) = ^C;'^q' gyany-
ihe.
To recognise= C;'^^'CJ' ngo-
she-pa.
Cold, adj. = ^]Z'^' trang-
mo.
Indian = :S'^^' gya-ka.
To fit (of clothes) = O^^^'C]'
driU-pa.
Exercise No. 17.
^ -^
What are those animals up there ? | y^'^'^I5^^'^(3J'^*(£'cn'
■^'^'^'■^^1 yO'-9^ sem-chen fe-tsho Ha-re Ha- re re.
They are a very long way off. gqj'^C^qj'^^r'Q^CCn | tha-
ring thaJc-chho du.
I cannot make them out even with field-glasses. zSC^'-jQOJ'a^'
qf^2^'(5i'C^C:'C;^^*^^'^'^'a^^2^ I gyang-she-la te-na-
ya7ig nge ngo-shing-gi rain-du.
There are no Indians at all here, as it is too cold for them.
de frang tra-tsang gya-Jca tsa-ne min-du.
Exercise No. 18.
These boots are too large. They do not fit me at all.
One of them is bigger than the other.
8
CHAPTER XI.
Postpositions, Conjunctions and Interjections.
1. Postpositions* — These are o£ two kinds, namely,
simple and compound. The former are monosyllabic, and
govern the accnsative. They include those used in the de-
clension of the noun (Chapter III) and a few others. The
latter are of two or more syllables, being formed from nouns,
adjectives or verbs, and mostly govern the genitive. Post-
positions may govern not only nouns, but also adjectives,
verbs, articles, etc. The use of most postpositions is simple :
only those, the uses of which require special explanations,
in addition to those already given concerning them in the
declension of nouns and other chapters, will be dealt with
here. For other postpositions reference may be made to the
Dictionary.
2. Simple Postpositions* — (a) f^^' Id besides its datival
sense dealt wifch in the Chapter on the Noun, (Cap. Ill), is
sometimes used where in English we should use at, on or in,
though ^C^'Q^' gang-la is more commonly used for on, and
aJC^'OJ' nang-la for in. Thus, ^f2 '^C^'^'^lIiy^^'Q^^^ j ri-i
gang-la ya du, there are yaks on the hill ; 5>'cBS'^(^'^'
sH^I I chhn-tshd sKi-la sho, come at four o'clock. OJ' should
always be used as above in telling the time of day. f^' is
also used where in English for is used in the quotation of
CHAPTER XI. 115
prices, e.g., q]U^'Q^^'"^'=^'?f ^5^'^T^'^'^<5j | yu di gor-mo
nyi-la nyo pa-yin, I have bought this turquoise for two
RUPEES. And the following verbs may take P^, namely, verbs
of giving, slwwing^ teachmg and telling -, also tbe following
common verbs, namely, 2v^'C]'g^'C|' ie-fa cKe-pa to have
faith in (a lama, etc.), ^^'R' sKe-pa to be afraid of, Q^S^qi'q'
pholc-'pa to hit against, Q'CJ' sKti-wa to offer to, to petition,
to beg of, ^^\^'^:Z'q' ro-cKe-pa to assist, Q^g^-y^C;'^* khe
yong-im to bring to, and many others. But with all the
above verbs and classes of verbs the 0^' may be omitted and
the simple accusative form used.
(b) (9J^' ne besides meaning out of, from, expresses also
through, via, e.g., C;'2<J^]-^'(5^^-C^r^^'5^^''^^'^'<5j^'2Tc:'C:'
/q'\ C^aJj nga Pha-ri-ne yong-ne Je-leii-la-ne yong-nga-yin.
I HAVE COME FROM PhaRI VIA THE JeLEP PaSS. 3^'<3j^ cUe-
ne may also be used in this sense. (3J^' also expresses hy, in
such sentences as catch the dog by the neck R'Q^^'^'^;^'
Q>R^ I khyi di ke-ne jii.
(c) OJ^' le besides its use in the sense of than, more than
already dealt with in the comparison of adjectives (Cap. IV,
para. 7), means also rather than, or except, e.g., ^^^'
116 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
le Pha-ri la chhim-pa ga-Jci-re, I would rather go to Phari
THAN STAY HERE. (Lit., rather than the staying here, the going
to Phari pleases.) Again, ^^J'S^^^'qTia^'q'^'^aj'^Ca^^'aj^'
^I'qj^'^' (R') ^S I pha-me ha-la ma-nyen-tsang di-le ma-
cKunq-nga-re. Since you have not heeded the orders of
YOUR PARENTS, YOU HAVE FALLEN INTO TROUBLE. (Lit., siuce
you have not heeded the orders of your father and mother,
except this it has not happened.)
(d) ^C fang, with is used with a few verbs such as those
of meeting, visiting, fighting, and with adjectives denoting
similarity, e.g., p^'^T'l^'Q^^'^C^^'gC | hhe-sanga mi di-
fang thulc-cKung, I met this man yesterday ; or p^'^'C'^C
^'^^'9^'^C^' I khe-sa nga-fang mi-di thuJc-cKiing. Again,
(^C^-q'a^^'^la^-l'i^C;'^'^^;'^;^^^'^^^^ | lung-pa di in-ji lung-
pa-t'ang dra-po re, this country is like England. Except in
such cases with should be translated by ^C'S^^^'^^" tang-
nyam-t'u, e.g., ps^C'S^^^'^'"^ l'|]C:'q'§(^'q'y5(3j | kho-fang
nyarn-t'u Dor-je-ling-la chhim-pa-yin. I went with him to
Dar.ieeling.
(e) Other postpositions governing the accusative are ^^\'
thu. AS FAR AH, UP TO, and one or two others.
3. Compound Postpositions* — These, as stated above,
mostly govern the genitive, e.g., ^Q^'^Q'(^' ri-% gang-la, on
CHAPTER XI. 117
THE HILL ; C^Q'^^'f^J' nge gyap-la, behind me, etc. A few
govern the accusative, for instance, ^'^^^^ | ina-to ^^'^'
( ^(9J'^') mem-pa, except ; e.g., Q^^'^^^^'^^^^'V^l^'q'^'
^^ J di ma-to sKem-pa yo-?va ma-re, this is the only one.
(Lit., except this there is not another.) And one or two like
arn'^'i:]' tha-nye-po, near, close to, govern the ablative ; e.g.,
G^'(9j^'33^'^'^^''^''^''^^ I di-ne sam-pa tha-nye-po-re, the
bridge is close to here.
4. Conjunctions. — Conjunctions ape used in Tibetan
much less frequently than in English, the sentences in which
they occur being turned into participial and other verbal
clauses, as has been already explained in the Chapter on the
Verb. Thus, 5^i^C:'^5jC;-5T[::'<3^^-^-5,c:'|a^'q'^i^ I dang-gong
yong-ne te-nng chhim-pa re, he came yesterday evening and
left to-day.
5. Those conjunctions which are commonly employed in
the colloquial language, and whose use requires special men-
tion, are as follow. For the others reference may be made
to the Dictionary.
(a) ^C I tang. This corresponds frequently to and in
English, though, as we have seen above, its literal meaning
is WITH. Thus, 5J^]'S,*a|'q|Usjq|-:^[;'gq|'5^c;'q'-^2^'^-^^[
Pha-ri la yak-t'ang hi mang-po yo-iua-re, there are lots of
YAKS and sheep AT Phari. But when more than two nouns
118 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
are thus joined, KQ' is used after the first one only or not at
all, e.g., z^i^^' (^'^\u^^}^' ( ^^c ) ^^ g^' ^c'Hf cXf^' q- 5.2^ |
Pha-ri la yaJc [fang) ra-lii mang-po yo-wa-re, there are lots
OP YAKS, GOATS AND SHEEP AT Phari. STC^' should always be
spoken quickly after, and almost as a part of the word
which precedes it, and this precedino- word takes the accent.
(^)^'5^'l t'(^'^'i'^ng ^•:^C:'y^C:'[ fa-rung yang, ^'0^]
t'an-do or CAJC* | yang, means besides, more yet and pre-
cedes the word which it qualifies, e.g., C^^'^'C^'^C^'P'gJJ''^^'
^'^C^'f^JTI'^'C^]^ I ^^^ go-nga gang-kha ma~nyd fa-riing toJc-
tsa yij, I have not bought all the eggs; there are A FEW
MORE YET.
(c) EITHER — OR is expressed by y^C^'^T(3j'(5;'— y^C'^<3j'(3j* yang-
men-na — yang-men-na^ or by y^C^'(3;'-- y^C^'(3\ | yang-na — yang-
na. The first UsIC:'§<3:'(3j' ( or y^C'^j') is omitted often in
Tibetan as well as in English, e.g., ^q5j'q''q'^(3j'«'(o^^'q'ai^'
y^rliaj'cfj's^-g^'q- (9'^') ^^S'^^^^'^^I fom-po la
nyen-sKn sKii-pa le yang-men-na ma-sKu-'pa ga diik-He ? Da
YOU PREFER THAT I SHOULD REPRESENT THE MATTER TO THE
OFFICIAL, OR THAT I SHOULD NOT. {Lit., RATHER THAN REPRE-
SENTING THE CASE TO THE OFFICIAL, OR DOES NOT REPRESENTING
please). Often the or in Tibetan is omitted altogether, e.g.,
CHAPTER XI. 119
^'2oC:i*q(acn:^'Q^KCn"cn'5^*a SyZTj | sa-hep sKu duJc-lca min-du ?
Is THE SAHIB AT HOME (lit. Seated) OR NOT ?
[d) The translation of although and of if has already
been explained in the Chapter on the Verb (Cap. V, para. 8,
and Cap. VI^ para. 15).
Occasionally qifTl|'^C' He-si is used for if ; e.g., ^'^-^'(X'
^Sl '^^y^^ thu'p-na ny'6-ro-clii, He-si nyo ma-fhiip-na thap yo-
iva ma-re. Please buy one if you can ; if you cannot
BUY one, it CAN^T BE HELPED.
(e) But is usually expressed by turning the sentence and
using y\|(3k'(3[^' / tXJ^'iS'C^C^'' ) yin-ne or some other word mean-
ing ALTHOUGH, IN SPITE OF, e.g., ^'"^CC^'Q^^'i^q'^'^CC^Tc^'S;^'
^CZ'^(5j'C^'Ci^'cr['CAj<3j I te-ring nga dro thicp ma-cKung, yin-
ne sang-nyi nga dro-Hyi-yin. I could not go to-day, but
I will go to-morrow. {Lit., In spite op my not being
able to go to-day, I will go to-morrow).
(/) Since, since the time that, ago. The translation of
these is best shown by examples. Thus, It is six months since
I left Lhasa. C'g'^'(3J^'^^'(5j^'3'q'5^'^^' I nga hla sa-ne
thon-ne da-ica tru song. I have not been to Darjeeling for
TWO years. cT '|'^C'a|'5|'g(3^-q-B5^2^^^-'?fc' I nga Dor-
je-ling-la ma-chhim-fa lo nyi song.
{g) Whether — or is expressed thus : — It is uncertain
whether he WILL ARRIVE TO-DAY OR NOT. R' ^'^ C^'^q'^sJC^'C^'
120
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
^'y^C^*fc5v'gJ(5['!5^^ I Iho t'e-ring lep-yooiy-nga mi~yong ten-den
me. Whether yoq go or stay, I shall remain here.
g^-^C-§^-^-yi-§^-3j u-Sj:^?^- ( n^^-^ ) ^--^-t^aj I khy-6-rang
chhin-na ma-chhin-na nga de d'6-hyi-yin.
6. Interjections,— Those commonly used are, Hfj ] l-ye
fg I we, Oh ! Hullo ! Hi ! I^'p'p'pq* a-kha-kha Jcha, Alas !
Exclamation of sorrow. l^'5' a-tsi, Exclamation of surprise.
Thus, ^g'^'^C'^^^'Hf ^aqj't^ I We ! Tshe-rmg gyoJc-po sho~
a, Hi ! TsHERiNG, PLEASE COME QUICKLY. H^' and f^' are used
also by masters to call their servants in the same way as
Ko'i hai is used in India.
Words.
Shi-ga-tse (capital of the j Country -house = qi§-^- sKi-
Province of Tsang) = ^\^'
Gang-tok (capital of Sikkim)
To put in, insert = ^;g^l'<^'
(Q^R2T|'q'\ chuH-pa.
Small-pox (a very common
disease in Tibet) = g'
Ha.
Do. hon. =^^]5^^^(^ g'6n-s%i-
To stay, dwell, ho7i. =q®qj^'
CJ' sKu-pa.
Yak^s meat = myqcn'^' yaJc-
sha.
Pork = S^^'-^A' phalc-sha.
Beef = ?^C^f^' lang-sha.
CHAPTER XI.
121
To obtain, procure =
(l^K,'!^' jor-tva.
Expensive (/i^ great price) =
^C^'(5<3['^' Hong-chhem fo.
Behind = ^'Q'fl]' gyap-la.
Mountain, hill == '^' n.
To snow = 2T|C;^'Aq'q' ^any
gyajp-fa.
Telegraph {lit. iron- thread)
= (g^^'^^' cha-kii.
Wonder^ wonderful thing =
y^'^cS<5\' yam-tsheri.
EXEECISE No. 19.
He went from Shi-ga-tse to Gang-tok via Phari. P'^(^'^'
tsG ne Pha-ri cKe ne Gang-toJc la chhim-pa-re.
He had only one servant with him then. ^'glC^'f^^'P'^C^'^^^'
2^-q|Kfq]'q^cr|6Z^'0^^'l]'Q^^^2:ri [ t'e gang-la Jcho tang
nyani-t'u yolc-po chi-le min-du.
Put some more wood on the fire. ST'^C'^sVOI'^C^'^^^ |
ta-rung me-la shing chu.
On account of the small-pox at Lhasa, he {hon.) is staying
at his country-house. g'2^'^'(^g5iI'SfS^'^C'^*^^^T'
g;|qja:'q|^-q'q®q]5s|-y5'^-q-^i^ | hla-sa Men-drum y'o-
tsang ku-sho gbn-sHi la sKu yo-ica-re.
Yak's meat, mutton, pork and beef are procurable here, but
the pork and beef are expensive. ^U^^V'^'i^^V^'
122 TIBKTAN GRAMMAR.
^T^^'SI^''^'^*^'^'^^^ I y^^-sh<^ liiJi'sha phalc-sha
lang-sha de jor-yong te yin-ne phalc-sha tang langsha
Jcong-chhem-po re.
Moreover, many of the people are sending their yaks away
to-day to the other side of the hills. S\':^C;'l}'3^C:'Hj2!s|'
^•^C^'^^y^^l'^S^'gjq'q'CTJ^'^j'Q^s^q] J ta-rung mi
mang-fo t'e-ring yali ri-i gyap-la tong-gi-du.
Ah ! what a wonderful thing this telegraph is ! l^^'S''^^^'
^ ^'ysI'^cb<3l'f^^^'Q^5'^^^ I a-tsi cha-kii yam-tshen din-
dra du.
Exercise No. ^0.
He has two servants with him. He has come vid Gang-
tok. If it does not snow he will go to Phari to-morrow, but,
if it snows, he will stay here. It is three years since he
came to (= he arrived at) Darjeeling. Alas ! will not the
boy die ?
CHAPTER XII.
The Order of Words in a Sentence.
1. The order in which different parts of speech in a sen-
tence follow each other has been in the main shown for each
Part of Speech in the chapter which deals with it, but it may
be convenient to the student that the principal rules should
be grouped together here. The order is first the subject,
-V— c^ cv
then the object, ;ind the verb last, e.g., C^^'P^'^C^'U^<3j |
nge khy'6 dung-gi-yin. I will beat you.
2. The component parts of the subject or object are usu-
ally arranged among themselves as follows : —
[a) The genitive.
(6) The governing noun or pronoun.
[c) The adjective, unless in the genitive, in which case
it precedes the noun.
[d) The numeral.
[e) The article or demonstrative pronoun.
3. Any relative or other clause dependent on the noun
may either be put in the genitive and precede the noun, or
take the case-inflection of the noun and follow it ; but
usually the former. Thus : The merchants who came to-
day should be translated ?'5!C'3Cf:;'^p(^*2'c35C:'^'^*(^ ] ^e-
ring yong-khen Jcyi tshong-pa t'e-tsho in preference to ^'^C
^Cr/^'y^Cl'^p:^*^'(5 I t'e-ring tshong-pa yong-khen t'e-tsho.
124 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
4. In correlative sentences the relative pronoun precedes
the demonstrative pronoun, e.g., (^27|'rT|c;'y^i^*r '^^-a^ |
lu Jcang-yo t'e-gye ny'6, buy all the sheep that there ark.
{lit., WHAT SHEEP THRRB ARE BUY THEM ALL).
5. The interrogative pronoun immediately precedes the
verb, e.g., ^^\0\^]^' 5^V^'^\5^^]^5^^ t'nJc-lo naJc-j'O
Hon-khen t'e su-re, who is the person that is wearing
BLACK CLOTHES ?
6. Participial and other dependent verbal clauses precede
the main verb, e.g., C'grq'S^s^^' (^^'^' ) ^^I^'^'^' ( ^' )
ysTC^'C^' (R'\ ^^ I nga lung-fa de mili'ta-lia yong-nga-yin,
I HAVE COMR TO SEE THIS COUNTRY {lit., TO SEE THE COUNTRY
here). So also when one verb governs another, the former
having a sense of causing, permitting, completing, being able
this governing verb comes last, e.g., piT'M'^cn'cn' khyb chhin
ehholc-Jca, you may go, i.e., you are permitted to go (an
ordinary form of dismissal).
CHAPTER XIII.
The Honorific Language.
1. In the chapter on the Pronouns (Cap. IX, para. 2)
reference has been made to the necessity of using the pres-
cribed honorific forms when speaking to or of persons of
good position. The difference between the honorific forms
in Tibetan and Hindustani is that in the latter these are
usually expressed by mere changes of termination, which are
few in number and quickly learnt, e.g., ao, aiye {come !)
whereas in the former the honorific is usually expressed by
a partially or wholly different word.
'Z. In order therefore that he may converse with the
higher classes of Tibetan society, it is necessary for the
student in respect of a large number of words to master two
Tibetan equivalents for each word, one for the common and
one for the higher classes. The ordinary language should
be used when speaking to cultivators, coolies, common monks
and ordinary traders ; the honorific language when speaking
to persons of higher rank than the above. When conversing
with the very highest classes, i.e., with members of the no-
bility, of whom there are about thirty families in the U (Lhasa)
and Tsang (Shi-ga-tse) provinces, or with officials from the
rank of De-pon, Tsi-pon or Pho-pon upwards, or with the
highest Lamas, a still higher form of honorific should be em-
ployed, if such, exists. The student need not, however,
trouble to learn more than a very few words at first in the
higher honorific since persons of the above high rank are not
often met with and the ordinary honorific will therefore al-
most always carry him throuorli.
126
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
3. The Dictionary at the end of this book is fairly com-
plete in honorific terms, the ordinary honorific words being-
marked as hon. and the high honorific as h. hon. It only re-
mains therefore to notice here such general principles as
exist in the formation of honorifics, so that the student may
be able in many cases to form them for himself.
4. Firstly,, as regards verbs those only need be mentioned
which occur frequently in compounds and otherwise.
Meaning.
Ordinary Form.
Honorific Form.
High Honorific
Form.
To put, at-
tach, ap-
gq-q-
m"^-
|5i-cj-=r]3jc:-q-
pV
gyap-pa.
kyom-va.
kybm-pa naiKj-
tca.
To sit, dwell,
remain
^^S^-
^m^'^'
qg^:^'^^3j-
(^T-^l
sKiipa.
Q^R^-q-
de-pa.
sUu-den-ja-pa.
To stand up
o^c-q-
q?|c:'q'
^•q^C (q^C-)
lang-toa.
(q^C-q)
"^^jC-q-
sKang-ica.
hu'sKang
nang-tca.
r
1
rA^'^'
^
1
'I'o say, tell -
lap -pa.
[ =1SC-q-
q^Q^-^a^c;'q'
a^-q-
1 sung-ica.
Iia-nany-u-a.
I
ser-n^a.
1
J
CHAPTER
XIII.
127
Meaning.
Ordinary Form.
Honorific Form.
High Honorific
Form.
To eat
S-q-
1
1
sa-wa. \
To take
aja^-ci-
I
q^^-q'
q^^-q-qj^jC-q-
lem-pa.
1
sKe-pa.
sKe-pa nang-
To wear, put
on (clothes)
Horn- pa,
1
J
iva.
f
Qqi'd' to go
]
1
Cv
To go, 1
come j
i
== dro-ica.
y\TC^'q' to come
>
1
1
phep-pa.
q' chhip-gyu
L. = yong-wa.
J
nang-iva.
To do
To give
2«^'q' cKe-ya.
^^'q* ter-u-a
1
J
nang-wa.
5. By far the commonest of the above forms is ^(SJCq !
nang-wa. In addition to its meanings given above, it can
be added for the formation of an honorific to most verbs that
have not got special honorific forms of their own, r.g.,
<^C^'q^'q^CC ( q' \ ^K I tshoitg-pe tang-nga re, the
TRADER sknt; 2^q5j'q^-qj^' c;- (q-) ^ajC;'^- (q*) S.^^]
pom-p6 tong-nga iiany-nga-rc, the official sknt. And here it
should be noticed thiit verbs which use the past or perfect
128 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
root in their ordinary forms take, as a rule, tlie present root
in their honorific forms, e.g., the example just given.
6. The above honorific forms are, as already stated,
applied to persons of position higher than the ordinary.
There are also a few verbs applied to persons, both of high
or of low position, when such persons are dealing with
persons above them. These verbs are in the Dictionary
labelled inf. to sup. (i.e., inferior to superior). Two of the
commonest are (5j'^' sKu-wa, for ^^'^' lap-pa, to say ; and
^q-q' (O^qq'q'x phu-u-a, for ^^'2^' ter-wa, to give. Thus
5;|M'Cq3;'^'2T|Scn^'f^'®^ I De-p'6n ku-sho-la sKii, repre-
sent (the matter) to TFIE De-PON.
When the inferior is himself a person of good position, the
verb implying inferiority takes itself an honorific form, e.g.,
>o ^ >» -v-^
q* horse, hon.) ^\^^]'a^q(^'^'' (q* ) cr|^C;'^C:'| l^u-sho Jong-
pen 'kyi De-pon ku-sho-la chhiJc-pa chi Jm-ra nang-song, the
JoxG-PKN has given A PONY TO THE De-pon. Note the hono-
rific form Q^qq*^- (q'\ cn5;c;'?TC^' hU-ra 7iang-song, and
cB^Tl'q* (^q^'q-) chhiU-pa, the honorific of c' ta, horse.
7 A great many words, mostly nouns, are formed from
the honorific terms applied to different parts of the body.
Thus —
{a) ^' hu gives honorific for many parts of the body, e.g.,
CHAPTER xiir. 129
^^^■^''^* S'uJc-jJO, BODY, ^'^^^^' ^'"fi-'^'fi, BODY, hoil. ; HQ,'
p^' pang-kho, chest (of hody), ^'3^' ku-jpang, chest, hon.
(h) ^^V chha, the honorific form of (^cn'CJ' laH-jjci, hand is
used for many things connected \vith or manipulated by
the hand, e.g., ^^^' chhan-di, hov. oF (^'^cn* (h'-m/\ key.
^*n'gj^' chJia-gam, hon. of ^M" gam^ box.
{(■) (^^^' sKap, the honorific form of ;^C;'^' kang-ya, foot
is used for things connected with the foot, e.g., (oj^^'r^jqi^'
sKap-rhha ^or (^^^'g^' ) hon. of g^' hlani, boot.
id) (^QJ' .sKe, the honorific form of p* kha, mouth, e.g., (op^'
^^^''^' sKe-kyem-ya, hon. of p'^?^'^' kha-hom-'pa, to be
thirsty.
(e) ^^' nni, the honorific form of ^'^V go, head ; 6.^^.,
^^*(e^" wii sKa, hon. of (^'^' sKa-mo, hat.
(/) s^C;^' .y/ianc/, the honorific form of frp^TI' (^'j na-khu,
NOSE ; e.g. ^aZJ^'O^^sr sKang-chhi, hon. of ^'Q^^^' nap-chhi,
handkerchief.
G/) ^<5;'^jB^' iiyen-chho, the honorific form of ^S^'S^^CR'
(^'^cB^l') am-chho, eau; ^3^'3^^2^'!T|'(IS^'pc;' nyen-chho-M i-
lhung,hon. of I^'S^'^^'^i^' ( f'^cB^' ) ^I'l^'RC;' a^/i r/</io-^'/i-
IJiuny, ear- HOLE.
9
130
TIBETAN GKAM3IAR.
[h) ^^' chen, the honorific form of g^m]' mi, eye, e.g., ^5:
^^^' chem-jm, hon. of licfj''^qr|^- milc-pa, eye-lid ; and
g3j'S:I^'®'<q' ctiem-phe sKu-wa (lit. to request the coming of the
eye) the inf. to swp. form of ^1^(3;'^' ( §^'^' ) tem-pa, to show.
(i) The other parts, e.g., ^^^' tshein, hon. of ?f so, tooth ;
g^^'y»> hon. oi f^' che, tongde ; ^m2]' gU, hon. oi ^ ke,
NECK have also their compounds formed on lines similar to
those above.
8. Other honorific forms from which compounds are often
constructed are as follow : —
(a) ^^^' thu, the honorific form of ^I^^' sem, mind.
Frequently used in niental and moral attributes, e.g., ^^^'
Q^^r^* thung-do, hon. of a^s^'q* do-pa, wish.
(b) qT[(^' ka, OKDER gives the honorific in man^^ words
connected with .speaking and the like, e.g., qT[Q.'ClJ(3J' la-len,
hon. of 0^3\' len, answer.
[c) ^3^' sKe, gives the honorific in words connected with
food and drink, e.g., i^(S2^'^"' sUe-sha, hon. of *A' sha, meat.
[d) ^^^0\' so, also gives the honorific in many words con-
nected with food and drink, and especially in connection with
their preparation, e.g., cn^a^'^q' s'6-thap, hon. of i^q'cBC
thap-tshang, kitchen.
CHAPTER XIII. 131
9. As the honorific of verbs is often formed by z^5;c;'q'
nang wa so the high honorific is frequently formed by adding-
qTjO^' ka, ^q]^' thu, or other of the honorific forms speci-
fied above, to the beginning of the words;
^'9-^ ^^*'^S^'9^'^' '^^^P'^^^ cKe-pa, to investigate.
'^^'^3^'^^^''^' "^'^P'^^'^ nany-ica, to investi-
gate, hon.
^'n^'*^'^'^'^^'^' /^■(^-^'^i_p nang-wa, to investigate,
h. hon.
and g"^'^* tso7n-pa, to compose (writing, etc.).
§'5^'i:]'^(^C^' tmm-pa nang-iva, to compose
(writing, etc.) hon.
^TIC^'g'^'^(^C'i^' ka4som nang-iva, to compose
(writing, etc.) h. lion.
10. When a word has no separate honorific of its own,
tajqi^' Id is often added to express respect^ e.g., ^'q^'0\^^'
su-mo-ld, lion, of ^'^' su-mo. matilrnal aunt. And f^cn^'
Id, (^^\^'^' le-si (h. hon. a^q|^-qq|^'U- ld-le,s or OJ'Q^' la-
wong) introduced into a sentence always signify respect.
11. The lower trades, such as hlacksmith, carpenter, mason,
etc., take ^rq'^gc' um-dze, as their honorific^ though ^q*
^c;2v' IS, strictly speaking, the honorific of <J^'^' tshem-pu,
TAILOR.
132
riEETAK GRAM.MAK.
12. (5^rCJ'(55' nam-fci-tsho and ^^'^' nam-pa are used in-
stead of ^' fsho to form the plurals of hem. nouns and pro-
nouns, 6. (J., ^C|(3j'^'(5^'^''5B' pom-po nam-pa-tsho, the
OFFICIALS^ /um.^ [5^''^^*<5^''^'(55* hhyc-rang narii-pa-tsho, you
(plural) /lo?^
13. Lamas have a few honorifics which are not shared by
laymen in addition to those specified in the chapter on the
Pronouns (Cap. TX, para. 3). Such as ?^'^^CflI'S;J^'^' A'w-
sKi7ig~la jjhep-pa ov higher still ^ '^C(3^'(^^CJ'^'^3iC;'CI' hi-
sKing-la chhlp-gi/ii nang-wa which mean to die, lit. to go to
heaven.
Road, journey= f^'S^'Hl' lang-
Do. hon.= ^S^'Ci\^' phtp-laQU.
Distance
rmg-thiing.
Do. hon.= Z^q'^^\' phep-tha.
Near = ^cr|y Hfj I'Hf tha-
nye-po, nye-po.
Words.
cv -V—
b ar = ^j^l'-s^.C'q' tha-ring-po.
Do. hon. = ^q- gcn'S;c;-q=^
phep-tha ring-po.
^^'^^■^C: tha. I Toride = ^'q-.Kom-j,a.
I Do. hon. = 0^^'^' chhip-pa,
i
i Eideable [lit. riding place) =
j '3"^'^' sKon-.sa.
Difficult = pqj-q^ lhaJc~po. [ Do. hon.=^q^'^' chkip-sa.
Do. hon. =
nye-po.
^•5^^a]'q' ],u- \ On foot = TfrCZ'^r lang-
^9 I
thang.
CHAPTER Xlll.
1:33
On foot, hon. = (Sq^'^C^'
sKap-ihang.
Country = (^C^'^' lung-jpa.
Extensive = :S'^(3j*i^' gya-
chhem-'po.
Moderate^ middling =
chi.
To be seated, to dwell, h.
2^* sKu-den-ja-'pa.
To go for a walk = c&5^'cB5^'
chham-chham-la dro-iva.
To go for a walk, hon. =
kun-chham la j-'hep-jm.
For h. hon. substitute
I f2^1ci'g'q]^C;'q' chhip-gyu
1 nang-iva for ^^'C]' fhep-
pa.
■na.
: Very well = Q'cS' o-
Slowly = ^I'O^'cn'Q^' ]ca~le Jca-
le.
\ Tea = S' c%a,
; Do. hon. = ^\^(^'E,' so cKa.
Exercise No. 21.
On a Journey.
Ordinary Language.
What is the distance of our journey to-day ? | ^"^C^'Q^S^'TI'
^^I'-^C^'i^C'^l'cB^'y^^'im t'e-ring lang-ka tha-ring-
thung Jca-tsho yo-pa '(
Only a short way ; it is not difficult. ^'-^C^'f^S^'^'S^^Xr
iM^'P^*^'^^ I t'e-rhig lang-ka tha-nye-po yd hhali-
■yo-me.
134- TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
How far have we to g-o to-morrow ? ^C'^<3y'Q.2pi'A'Cn'(^ff'
ysJC'i!^ I sang-nyi dro-gyu la-tshb yo-pa ?
A long way, and the road is bad. ^C^*^(3;'ig^''^C;'^55s:'a|^'
m'gm|'XQJ'y^(5: 1 sang-nyi tha-ring-po yd lang-ka dulc-
rit yin.
Can we ride to-morrow ? ^C;'^(5j'e-^'(3j^'a^^^*C^^'q^ |
sang-nyi ta sKon-ne dro-sa yo-pe ?
It is rideable for a bit of the way^ and for a bit of the way
we shall have to walk. i;cn'^-ccT|'^-q'Sa;'^-y^:^%|'
^yij-^-*q-^C::q'Q^^^5[^'J'Sf^ 1 toJc-tsa tol-tsa-la
sKon-sa-y'd toJc-tsa toJc-tsa kang-thany-la dro go-kyi-
yd.
Is the district an extensive one ? I^C^'^'^W'^^'^'^^^'^^ !
lung-pa t'e gya-chhem-po duJc-Jce.
It is of moderate size. c&'^C'f3^(3S^^'Hf m^^'C^^^^j | chhe-
chhung tsham-po chi du.
Honorific Language,
phep-lam tha-ring-thiing Jca-tsh'6 yo-pa nang-nga ?
^'^Z:^R'^^fR^^^^'^'^(^''^'^S I i'^-'^^'^y phep-tha nye-
po yin ku-nye-po me.
^Z:'^^P^^^'^^'^^^\ sang-nyi phep-gyu Ka-tsho yo-
pa.
CHAPTER XIII. 135
fhejp-tha rtng-po yo yhep-lam yang yalc-po vie.
nyi chhiJc-pa chhip-ne 'phep-sa yo-pe ?
rqj^'J'y^C l toU-tsa toTi-tsa-la chhip-sa yd toU-tsa
tok-tsa sKap-thang-la phep go-kyi-yo.
(^CI'q'^'qi'(^5;'q'Q.^2:n'2T|^^ | lung-pa t'e gya-chhem-po dulc-Jce ?
(^^^'^'^C^'Q^c^^^'q'njS^'f^^Siri I Id chhe-chhnng tsham-po-
chi du.
Exercise No. 22.
(To he translated into honorific language).
Is the Sahib at home (= Is the Sahib seated) ? No Sir, he
has gone for a walk. Ver\^ well, I will call again (= come)
to-morrow. I cannot nnderstand what yon say ; please
speak slowly. Give the Sahib some tea.
CHAPTER XIV.
Miscellaneous.
1. I. Monetary System.— This is as follows :
0
kha
make 1 lar-ma-nga,
^^■5I-gI
?,
hha
„ 1 chhe-gye
I'^-^S'^I
4
kha
„ 1 sKo-kany
W'l^'i
5
kha
,, 1 kha-chha
p-5^1
6
kha
,, 1 trang-ko.
hi
One trang-ka at present (1918) is equal to four annas.
5 sKo (or 3 trang-kas and 1 kar-ma-nga) make sKo-nga. ( (^'^' )
= thirteen annas and four pies.
10 sKo (or 6 trang-kas and 1 sKo) make 1 ngu-sang /^CfZ|'^C\
= one rupee eleven annas approximately.
50 ngil-saiig make 1 do-tshe (^'cS^T' j = eighty-three rupees
seven annas approximately.
In addition to the above there are lumps of silver in tlie
shape of a pony's hoof, which are of different sizes and conse-
quently of different values. Such a lump is known as a
ta-mi-ma ( S'^ZTl'S^ ] \
CHAPTER XIV. 137
2. The above values are not all coined. The silver coins
are : frang-la, sKo-nga, ngii-sang. The copper coins are : —
kha-Jcang, kar-ma-nga, chhe-gye.
In addition to these coins and the ta-mi mas already
mentioned, Indian rupees^ Chinese rupees and Indian cur-
rency notes are used in Tibet.
There are no gold coins.
3. IL "Weights and Measures.— For weighing .i[>'old,
silver, corals, pearls, etc., the above-mentioned coins and
money values up to and including a ngii-sang are used as
weights. In weighing gold, a ngii-sang {silver sang) is
known as a ser-sang ( ^^^'^C ) (gold sang), and in weigh-
ing corals, pearls, etc., is known simply as a sang. For
weighing gold of large amount we have, —
r> ser-sang make J t'um-pn ( ^^'^ | ]
Similarly for silver of large amount, 7-5 ngii-sang make I
ta-mi-ma. 1 kha, 1 sKo, 1 sang, 1 ngii-sang or 1 ser-sang
is expressed by P'^C^* kha-l^ang and not P'^TI^^m- etc. Two
of the above (except p' which is not much used in the plural)
by (S* ^' sKo-to, etc. The divisions of money and the
weights for gold, silver, etc., are constant throughout Tibet.
The weights and measures for meat, grain, etc., vary in differ-
ent parts of the country ; those for the \J (Lhasa) province
will be given here.
4. Meat, butter ^ etc., are weighed by par ( g^" ) nya-lca
( ^'^' ) ^^^ ^^^^ ( P^' )• ^ P^^' ^^ ^ nya-Ha and 20 iiya-ka = I
hhe, a firr being equal to about an ounce.
lotS TIBETAN' GRA.AI.AIAl}.
5. Grain is not weighed but measured. Of the t're l^' )
there are two sizes, viz., the large tre, known as t're-chhe ^
(•^'^' )> of which 16 make 1 ten-dzin kha-ru ( ^^<3i'Q^(3J'pQ^'"
^' \ and the small t're known as Icha-t're ( ^0\'Q' \ of which
20 make one ten-dzin klia-ru. Sixteen of the hha-t're make 1
sang-ho (3C^^'(^^'\. A ten-dzin hha-rn contains 33 lbs. of
barley or peas and 17 lbs. of barley flour.
6. Tea is always carried in compressed packets, shaped
like bricks and known as pa-Ari ( <^'T[^' \. The weight of each
l)rick varies with the different kinds ; a brick of dru-t'ang
( Q^i:^'?:^' \ tea, which is the best kind of tea, weighing about
6 lbs., while a brick of the worst kind, known as gye-pa,.
( ^^2r'q' ^ weighs about 3 lbs.
4 bricks = 1 khu-fru ( P'5^* )
3 khu-tru = 1 gam ( ^S\' \
7. Lineal Measurements. — Those commonly used are
as follows : —
Sor (^^')t the breadth of one finger.
Tho (^^')« ^^^^ span from the tip of the
thumb to the tip of the middle
finger.
i Or se-tre ( ^^'g ) I
CHAPTER XIV.
139
Thru (E')* ^^® distance from the elbow to
the tip of the middle finger.
Do7n (^^^')* ^^^ distance from the middle
finger tip of one hand to that
of the other with both arms
outstretched.
Ke liO'sa-tsa ( ^^•cn'^'^'\j the distance the voice carries, e.g.,
mi te ke Ho-sa tsa-la
dUj THAT MAN IS JUST WITHIN
EARSHOT.
T.^ha-fho (<3g-Q^^'); or Tsha-sa [^'^'); about 3
hours' march or 7 to 10 miles
in easy country.
Sa-tshi { ^'^^ )\ ^ i'^dl day's march or about 15 to
20 miles in easy country.
8. Ill, Divisions of Time.— Time is reckoned by
cycles, the commonest of Avhich is that of twelve years,
known as the lo-khor ( a|'Q.p]^' ) and is as follows r —
1. 9'^' cKt-'wa, MOUSE.
2. gjC^' lang, bull.
3. ^^V' tali, TIGER.
4. y^^* y'o, HARE.
.5. ^9^' druli, DRAGON,
6. gO]' drii, snake.
7. £' ta, horse.
8. W27]' hi, SHEEP.
140 TIBETAN GftAMMAR.
9. g" tre, MONKEY
10. fl' cHa. BIRD.
11. p' khyi, DOG.
12. ^^y fha, PIG
It should be noted that the ordinary word for hare is
ri-kong ^'^]Z: (^'qC'), and the Lhasa word for monkey is
jpeu |j(^' ( ^T^' ) . But in the lo-khor U^^' //o and §]' trc
are always used.
9. A cycle of sixty years, known as long-kham ( a|*p5^^' \
is formed by joining the five elements, namely, -piZ,' shiny,
WOOD, ^' me, FIRE, :^' sa, earth, 'g'7]^' cha, iron, and (3&'
o/i/iii, WATER to the twelve creatures of the lo-khor in the
following manner : —
*''^^'3'^' ^^'^''^9'^^'^ Zo = WOOD-MOUSE YEAR.
-. sHCglC^'fll' shing-lang lo = wood bull year.
'3. 5s^'^^*Q^' me-tak lo = fire-tiger year.
4. ?^'y^^'(^' me-yo lo = fire-hare year.
And so on. The first round of elements ends at the 10th
year water-bird year ( ^'q'Sp ), chhu-cHa lo, and is at once '
recommenced, so that the 11th year is the wood-dog year
( ^C^'rg'f^^' \ shing-khyi lo, the 12th year is the wood-pig
year ( sac;'5:JCTI'a|' \ shing-jjha'^ lo, and so on. At sixty years
the two series end together, the lo-khor having run five
times and the elements six times. We then get the wood-
CHAPTER XIV. 141
MOUSE YEAR again, and the cycle runs throng']i as before.
The present years are as follow : —
1917--FIKE-SNAKE YEAR ^'^^O^'H^' we-dril lo.
]918 EAKTH-HOKSE YEAR ^'^*ri|' sa-fci lo.
1919 — EARTH-SHEEl- YEAR ^'OJCn'O^' sa-IuJc lo.
1920 — IRON-MONKEY YEAR (gCTI^'fJ'aj' rhaK-tre lo.
1921 — IRON-BIRD YEAR '^^'^'3*^ chahclia lo.
1922— WATER-DOG YEAR (^'R'SJ* chhu-khyi lo.
1923— WATER- PIG YEAR c^'5;jqi'af chhu phali: lo.
1924— WOOD-MOUSE YEAR ^C^'^'Sf shiiuj-cUi lo.
1925— WOOD-BULL YEAR sSc:'^C;'5f shiiig-laivj lo.
192(5— FiRE-T[GER YEAR ^I'^cn'O^' me-faH lo.
1927— EIRE HARE YEAR ij-y^^'ioj^ rilP-yb lo.
1928-EARTEI-DRAGON YEAR ^'q^qin'af Sa-dvilH lo.
10. Practically every Tibetan can tell the date of his
])irth and otherwise reckon in the lo-hhor, but comparatively
tew can do so in the sixty years^ cycle. The latter is, how-
ever, used m Government papers, in books and in correspon-
dence. Thus, C:'^'afq'C^T(3j I nga ta-lo-pa yin means I was
BORN IN THE HORSE YMAR {lit. I AM A HORSE YEAR PERSOn).
11. The /b7ir seas-ons are as follows : —
Spring— 2^qr';T|' chi ha.
Summer- :;^gj;^-m' yar-ha.
Autumn — ^^(^'^' tini-ka.
Winter— s::^(3:Tn' giln-ka.
142 TIBETAN GKAISIMAIJ.
12. Dates. — Months liave no names, but are numbered
1, 2, 8_, etc. The 1st month commences in February, but the
actual date varies as the Tibetan year is shorter than ours and
therefore every third year an extra month named ^\aC4'
da-b-ho is added. Each month has about thirty days. Tlie
manner in which the different days of a month are expressed
has been dealt with in the chapter on the Numerals (Cap.
VIII, para. 6).
13. The Days of the Week are as follows : —
Sunday - ZT|3Q^''o'^' sa niji' Wednesday— ^3^ ' "^^ '^ '
ma. I sa-hlali-pa.
Monday— cnSQ^'^'q' sa-da- Thursday — ^]3Q.'^^'kI' sa-
te a. i fliur-pu.
Tuesday— qj5Q^'|^Tq|'r 51]^' 5'a- Friday— CT|3Q^'q';^C:^- sa-
ming-ma. ya-sang.
SATURDAY~^13'3^'|l(3i'q'.9a-pe?M-^,')a.
14. The Time of Day. — This is reckoned as follows : —
3'mS'S^'^r ^^^-^e t'ang-po, first cock crow.
2'^^'^'^^'^' cKa-h-e nyi-pa, second cock crow, 10 or 15
minutes after the first.
^'■^C^^' tho-rang, the time shortly before dawn.
(3j^'(^C^^' navi-lang, dawn.
^\n^' nyl-shar, or g'VQ^' tse-shar, sunrise.
CHAPl'ER XIV. 143
The latter means, lit. shining on the peaks.
{Scn^'cr|^' sKolc-Jce or ^'^' nga-t'ro the time from sunrise to
about 8 A.M.
cS'^C^' tsha-ting, from 8 a.m. till 10 or 11 a.m.
^^''^^^' »?/in-A'«?i(/^ midday.
^snC^'^271' goiiy-t'a, the afternoon from four o'clock till sunset.
^'5|^' ^^lA-g'', sunset.
^*^^' (^^'^^') ^^f^-^-^P. clusk.
'^^'SS' ^^^^^'^ chhe, midnight.
S'g^' nyi-ma, day-time.
^SE'^ yong-mo or S^^cSt^J'?^' tshem-mo, night-time.
(Scn'rf xKcili-iJo, day of 24 hours.
At what time^ at what o'clock may be rendered by ^'^J'
cn-cn'^' (^^'\ 0^' ngam-chhi Ka-Jia-t-sa-la (lit. at hnc much
ly-late); e.g., Z'^Zj'^^'^'^'^'^'t ( ^3^' ) q'q^^'S^3[^r
i|(3;'(^ I nga sang-nyi ngam-chhi Ha-Ia-tsa la cha go yin-na.
At AEODT what time TO-MORhOW SHOULD I COME ? ^(3['^2T1C
03'-^ I nyin-lung-la sho, come at midday. But usually
^•^^- chhu-tsh'6 (lit. water-measure) corresponding to the Eng-
lish o'clock is used. Thus : about what timk to-moruow should
1 COME ? z^sjc;- |(5j- ^•^^•^' ^^' ^' f^' c:* ^^^' ^^'^' ^^^
ea)
144 TIB K'l' AN ( T K A M 31 A K .
( <3\5^ I ) sany-nyi chhn-tsh'6 Jia-tsho tsa-la nga cha go-ica yin-
na? Come at four o clock. <5&*,$S.'^(oj'f^'^/^^ | rhhu-tsho
sKi-lasho. Come at half past five. (S'<:SS''3'^U'5^'T[\acn I
chhu-fslw nya-fang chhe-ka sho.
Words.
Ornament=^5;'cS' gyen-chha. Woollen clotli= ^5;|'^' nam-
bu.
Price = ^^' ring.
AVeight, {JlL light heavy) =
ysTC;'g I 1=^- yang-ji - jL
Festival, {lit. great time)
Exercise No. 28.
This ornament is made of silver. | :S(3\'cB'^^'5^^'3'^35^'
^'^S I gyen-chha di ngu-Kyi so-ja-rr.
Its price is thirty-two trang-kas and one sKo. ^Q'-^^J'p'm*
.^!^'§'?f ^^^r^C;'"^2T]C:'2,^ I /^ / ring trnng-lca siim-
rhit so-nyi fang sKo-Jcang re.
It weighs (lit. is the weight of) twelve and half rupees.
chhe-fang chuH-sum Ityi ji yo-iva-re.
Please sell me two dam of woollen cloth. C^'d^'^^l'^'Q.^^'
^v'Q^^'c;* '=R,cn^'g^' (g^')] nga~la narn-hu dom to
tshong-ro-clii.
CHAPTER XIV. 145
It is rather farther than a tsha-pho from here. Q.^'^^'(^'
a^^'^-OJ^'^qj-^C;-^- (^5^-) l^^^ di-ne tsha-pho
sa-le tha-riny-tsa y'6.
How old are you ? [g^'f^'^'cB^'CXjas*^ | khyo lo Ha-tshd yim-
^a ?
I was born in the hare year. C^*ysJ^'fi5'CJ'y^<3j J nga yo-lo-pa
yin.
There will be a festival on the twenty-fourth of the first
month. i-q-^^c'STo^y ^-q^' q- ^^' '^&^ ^^^' Kfc' j
da-wa fang-po nyi-shu sKi-la fii-chhen-chi yong.
Come on Wednesday morning. ^3Q.'g*'Tj'CJQ.*(oj27]^'2T|^'
^^c^ I sa hIaJc'pe sKoJc-Jce sho.
Exercise No. 24.
I will sell it for five ngu-sang and a kar-raa. It weighs
twenty-three trang-kas. I will leave (= go out from) here
on the morning of the eighteenth, and will reach G-angtok
on the afternoon of the twentieth. The price of this woollen
cloth is two trang-kas and a kha-chha per thru.
CHAPTER XV.
A CONVERSATION TRANSLITERATED, TBANSLATED AND PARAPHRAaED.
1. It has often been stated with regard to grammars of
Oriental languages that they are rendered more useful by the
inclusion in them of a passage of the language translated
literally into English, transliterated as exactly as possible
into the Roman character, and accompanied by a grammati-
cal analysis of every word. This plan enables the student
to ascertain the true pronunciation and also to understand
the working of rules that he knows only by rote. And al-
though in this grammar the rules of pronunciation and of
grammar have not merely been enunciated but have also at
the time of enunciation been separately and fully explained
by examples, yet a final example giving effect to the above
suggestion may prove helpful to the student before we pass
on to the conversational series in the next chapter.
Oil a journey. Ashing the ivay.
Which is the road
to Darjeeling ?
... Dor-je-ling k'i
Darjeeling of
... KVpa re.
lam-ka
road
Straight on, Sir,
where is ?
as La kha-thu
t'ak'-k'a
you are going.
Sir ! Straight
like that
re.
•=^1
CHAPTER XV. 147
You cannot mistake nor-sa tsa-ne me.
mistaking-place at all is not.
Is the road good?... Lam-ka de-po yo-pe.
Road good is it ?
Yes, Sir, it is very La de-thak'-chho yo.
Sir ! very good is.
How far is it from T'a dro-gyu k'a-tsho yo-pa.
here? ^. ^.f ^- ^ t>^- ^^- C^]
Now to go how much is there ?
It is not very far T'a phe-gyu sh'e-po rang me.
from here, just a r- ^jq- ^. ^-^ ^q- ^- |
short distance. 3
Now to go very much is not ?
Tok'-tsa chi yo.
A little is.
Thank you, Good-day. Wong ya ch'ung k'a-le
^z: v^^\ ^c:- ^\(^'
Well 1 good happened. Gently
gyu-a.
go.
148
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Good-day, Sir
. . . La-si k'a-le
ttie-a.
q^^'li' =T]'q'
ig^'l^l
Sir ! Gently
go.
Grammatical Analysis.
*'g'g|C^'^]' Genitive Singular, en' and not |T]' or ^I' ^^-
cause the preceding word ends in C (Cap.
Ill, para. 9).
QJ5;j*T|' Nominative Singular. The is omitted because it
does not represent this or that (Cap. II, para.
7).
^V^' Interrogative Pronoun. It immediately precedes
the verb (Cap. IX, para. 17).
^^' 3rd person singular, present indicative.
OJ^]^' Honorific term.
Adverb.
Adverb.
^•^' Nominative Singular. Derived from ^^'^' to
mistake and ^' place (Cap. VII, para. 19).
§"(5s^' Adverb. Used with negatives only [Cap. X,
para. 3 (h)].
ijC' Negative form of 3rd person singular;, present
indicative.
CHAPTER. XV. 149
tlJ^'T[* Nominative Singular. The is omitted because
it does not represent this or that.
^^'■^1* Nominative Singular.
ysj^'i^^' Interrogative form of the 3rd person singular
present indicative (Cap. V^ para. 5).
^^'i^^'cB^' Nominative Singular. Ver/j expressed by add-
ing ^2:n'(5^' to the root of the adjective [Cap.
X, para. 3 (m)).
UsJ^' 3rd person singular, present indicative.
-5' Adverb.
Q^Sr^- Gerund of f^^'^'
2TI'(^^' Adverb. Being used interrogatively immediately
precedes the verb [Cap. X, para. 3 (/)].
U^I^'CJ' Interrogative form of the 3rd person, singular
present indicative (Cap. V, para. 5).
^q'^' Infinitive of ^q'^' hon. of 0^^' (Cap. VI,
para. 23).
(R'^'^C^' Adverb. Used with negatives only [Cap. X,
para. 3 (g)\.
^^^'■d'^S^' Adverb.
QJC^* Adverb.
ysjsn* Abbreviation of y^^^'q•
150 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
^C Past Participle of y^C^'CJ* to become, to haypen.
^^0\' Adverb.
^^'^' Imperative of fS^l'^' polite form used to inferior.
fij^^'^r Honorific term.
^^*l^' Polite Imperative of ^^'CJ' which is an hon.
formofQ^^qj] H
CHAPTER XVI.
Conversational Exercises.
1, General Conversation.
Who are you ? jf^'^'^^^'^^ | ^^^V^ ^'^* yi^n-jm ?
What is your name ? ^'Ijc^'a^'CTI'^'i^'^'S^^ | hhyo raing-
la, Jca-re si M-yo ?
Sir, what is your name ? hon. ^'^^^'J'^"^*^'^'^'^'®'
&|'C^C'r I ku-sKo-Jcyi tshen-la Jca-re sKu-M-yo ta ?
My name is Dorje. E:^'lic;'q*T'|'i^'2'y^=^ ] nqe-ming-la
Dor-je si-Jcyi yo.
Do you know this ? hon. O^^^^Pi^S^^\^^^^ \ di
khy em-pa nang-gi yo-fe ?
I don't know. C;^'^^*J]'5^^ | ^^^^ shing-gi me.
Do you know this man ? hon. '^'Q^'^^^S^^'^^^'^'^^'
CJ2^ I mi di ngo-khyem pa nang-gi yo-pe ?
I don't know him. C^'pT C^'^jQ^'^'S^^ | ^S'e kho ngo-shing-
gi me.
-V-.- Cv
What country have you come from ? R^'(^CK|'^*(5^'ysI<9j'^ |
khy 6 lung-pa Jca-ne yim-pa ?
Sir, where were you born ? hon. ^'^\^^\^'(^Q'^'^'^^''^^'
152 TIBETAK GKAMMAR.
^'^15;CC' I hi-^Ko thrung-sa Ica-ne yim-pa nang-
nya /
I was born in Kongbu. C^'^'^'TjC'Cl't^ji^'C^^J ] nga kye-sa
kong-po-ne yin ?
A man has come. ^'^S^'^^^2^*gC^' | mi chi lep-cKtcng.
S3
Who is that boy ? i^'^l'^'^*'^^ | pu-gu t'e su-re ?
I want to be off to-morrow {lit. I am counting on starting
to-morrow). C^C^'*^<3J'(^^^'^Q^'§'^'y^^ | nga sang-
nyin thom-pe-tsi yd.
Will he come now ? p'^'f^'g^^'C^^'C^ ] kho tan-da Up
yong-nge ?
Open the window a little please. S'pc:'R2Tl'^'^fX^^'^<5jC' |
gi-khung tok-tsa chhe-ro-nang.
Shut the door. §J'^^ I 90-gyctp.
When did he go ? pcTj'sr^'qC^^'^C:' | kho ka-tii lang',^ong.
How do you like this place ? {lit. Sir, is this place pleasant ?)
hon. ^^^^^'^'^'^"^"^^^^^ 1 ^^'S'^o sa-chha
di tro-po diiJc-He ?
It is very quiet. ^'cB'O^^'P'^'ll^^'^'^^^^^ -m-c/ia di kha-
kusim-po du.
I am very pleased to have come {lit. it is very good that 1
have come here). C:-5^^^'q^^'«3j^'y^^'^^'*^S'3^'II
nga de char-ne yak-thak-chho cKung.
CHAPTER XVI. 153
2. The same continued.
Please give me a cup of water. C'^l'^'^^^'y^t^'^C;'^^'^ ]
nga-la chhu ka-y'6 Hang te-da.
Tell the man to come to me. ^'^'(^j^'^A^qi'g^ i 7m t'e tshn
sho cKi.
Please give this bundle to the woman. ^^]*5:]^'(S^'^'^3^(3J'
^'!^'^^'^^^'^(5;C' I doJc-thre di kyi-men te-la kiir-ro-
nang.
Can I go there ? C:'5J'5]'^(3j'^'q]'5;2^'q^ | 7iag yha-He
chhin chhoH-Hi-re-ye ?
Are you coming with me ? g^^' C: ' ^^3^'q'' B^C'^^iJaj' ^^ )
Miyo nga nyam-po yong-gi yim-fe'^
He can come. p'^KJCisS^'Sl''^^ [ kho yong chhok-Mi-re.
Where have you come from ? ra^'Cn'5[5^'y^C^'C | khyb Ica-ne
yong- nga /
I came from Phari this morning. C^'-^C^'srn^STi'cn^'iqcn'^"
(3Ii^*CAJCCysJ(3j J nga fa-rang sKoH-He yha-ri ne yong-
nga yin.
Are you quite well? hon. ^'^jScri^'^'^l^^l^'^^-q^yT^'
CJ^ ] ku- sKo ku'Su de-'po yo-pe ?
Fairly well, thanks. fll^^'I^f^s'^'^^ | Id au-tse y'6.
154 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
When will the man come to see me ? 5s^'^'CQ.'§"'^'2qi'r^T'
y^C^'Cfi'^r f mi-t'e nge tsa-la Jca-tu yong-gi-re.
I don't know whether he will come for some months,
lep-e-yo7ig nge yaH-yo-vang shing-gi-me.
How long are you staying on here ? hon. ^^2^'^'cB^'
q(5|2T]^'q|iN(5j'Q^R2T|'§j'C^r3j'q I de Jca-tsho sKu'den-ja-
Jci yim-ya ?
How do you know he is a Bhutanese ? p'f^^g^l'CJ'ys^^^'^'R^'
^^'^Tj-Q^^^-^^'aj^'^^'^'ST^ I kho driil fa yim-pa
khyo-re Jcan-dre cKe-ne shing-gi-yn /
Is this story true ? p'^'^^*cB'f^^'=^^'<3j^'^^'q^ | ATio Jce-
chha di ng'6-ne re-^e ^
It is a good deal exaggerated {lit. he has tied on many
feathers). ^«^'<5'^-^^^T:;-q'-q!^q|^- 5j^- ^^^ ^ ^:^ |
ke-chha fe dro mang-po taJc-ne she-pa re.
You had better not do that [lit. your not doing like that is
preferable). j^^'^'^^'S^'^^'^'^^^'^'^^ I ^^'hyo-
t'en-dra ma cKe-pa ga-H-re.
It does not matter. raff'^'Qcqi hhye min-du.
so
There is no help for it {lit. there is no means of doing for
this). Q^^'3:^'gq^-Sf2::'q'3;|'^^ j di-cKe-thop yo-wa-
ma re.
That would not be quite right. ^'"^'^'yTc'^'li'Qy^^ f
^*
te toK-tsa yong-nga min-du.
* CHAPTER XVI. 155
3. Talk with Servants.
Come here ! 5|^^'^/^2:T] de sho.
(to away ! ^ij^'^^ P^^ QV^-
Come quickly ! ?^yT]^'q'^ gyol-'po sho.
Don't delay ! f^^'^^'3^ I gor-fo ma-cKe.
Throw this away ! ^^'^^'^5^'"^ ^^ V^'^ yuJc-sKo.
Be careful ! ^"^j'^'^^ ] tem-po cKi.
Take this away ! O^^'CJ^'Q^R^ | di yha khye.
Wait a moment ! S^'^'§J^'^^ tol-tsa gu-shi.
I will come presently. C;'a^^'^C:'^^':^C:" | nga lam-sang
lep-yong.
Don't do that ! ^'C^^'S^J'q^ | fen-dra via-cKe.
Don't make such a noise ! S^'^'^5'^'5^' ^^' t^^^^-dra ma-
gyal.
Do this first and do that afterwards ! ^^'^^' ( ^* ) ^'f^ 1
^^•qiacn'QJ'q^ ) di ngen-la cKi ; te sKulc-la cHi.
What is this? Q^^'2qi'3:^'« | di Ica-re re.
Is everything ready ? c^C^'a^'nncq'S^'^fc'C;^ | tshang-ma
t'ra-dri song-nge ?
156 TIBETAN GRAMMAR."
Where have you put my umbrella ? I cannot find it.
oiyi-du Ica-pa sKa yd ? te nga nye-ma-cKimg.
CHAPTER XVI. 157
4. The same continued.
Fetch some hot water ! cB'c&'C|' CWI'>^•Q^ra^•^ac^ chhic tsha-
po toU-tsa khye sho.
Please bring dinner (/ion.) at half past seven. 5cnC^'^ Q *(ojaj'
f^^'cB'cB^'-^S^^j'^Cg^T'm'O^'Sijai i gong-mo sKe-la chhu-
tsho dun tang chhe-ka Id phil.
Call me at a quarter past six to-morrow morning !
sang-sKo nga-po chhu-tsho truJc fang mi-li che-nga la
nga ke-tony.
I want break-fast at a quarter to nine. C(i'(oj2T|25^'^Q.'P'Cl|2T|"
^lioJc-kei kha-la chhii-tsho gii dung -nga Id mi-li che-nge
ngen-la khye-sho.
Call my servant ! CQ^'qiy^cn'cn' / q* \ ^^'qKr-f nge yok-
ko ke'tong.
The cook is ill to-day. ^'^C^*^'($(9J'^'Sn*Q.2:q| t'e-ring ma-
chhen na-ki-du.
Have you swept this room ? pC'CJ'3^^^"2n'^^*2^^ | khang-
'pa de ke gyap-pe /
Clean all the brass ornaments (lit. articles) ! ^m'qn'^'ajcn'
I^C'p'Q^gi^'S^^'CTJ^' I rak-ki cha-la gang-kha chhi-
dar tong.
158 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Put those there and throw these away ! ^'<^*^'^n^'(?l^ |
ar-^*5;ja;^'rncn te-tsho pha-lce sKo, di-tsho pha yu.
Do you understand ? m^'^o'cn'^C^'C^^ ] khyo ha-Jco cKicng-
nge?
What had we better do now ? {lit. the doing what now is
preferable). ^'CTI'^'g^'q'^^^Q^'^'^^ | t'a Jca-re cKe-
pa ga-ki-re.
e^ -V ^v CS
Please take this letter to the post. C^*2T|'C;^^'y^^|'pc;*Q|'
Qra^'^^l^'g^ I y^'d^ ^^ yik'khang la khye-ro-cKi.
Come in ! (3kC'0J'*a^l nang-la sho.
Take this letter to the doctor, hon. ^<S^%'0^^^'0\'3<\'^^^0^'
^jCL^'^lC[^^ am-chhi Id Id yi-ge di kye-sho.
Let me know when the doctor hon. comes. I^5^'c5'(^^]^'
-5J^'gC^*5j*Cf^^'^P^'«^^ am-chhi la phe-cKung-na,
nga len khye-sho.
CHAPTER XVI. 159
5. Food.
I want a little drinking water. C^' Q^igC'y^'S] ' ^'^^z^j ' ^'
2^5]25^'l^^ I qiga thung-ya-Jci chhu toJc-tsa go yd.
Have you boiled it ? ^•^'^q'-^' (q*) C^^^^'^^ | ('hhu t'e ko-ra
ymi-'pe ?
Cv c> -V
Is it from a spring or from a stream r ^'^^'^'^'^^'^ [
^^'<5t^'§'^^'^ I chhu-mi-lci chhu re-fa, gyuk-chhil-
chhu yim-pa ?
Is milk obtainable here ? 3^5:^''q;5q'(:;^g^'5fc:'C:^ | de o-
ma jor-yong-nge ?
No, Sir, there are no cows. fa|^^'S'^OT^*^^^'^5^'
Ij'SlC:' I 3^^^rq'^^^'5fc'q-5^'5,^ I U ku-sKo dejor
mi~yong ; de pa-chhu yo-wa-mare.
Bring tea at five o'clock. <3&'c^^'f^'f2^*5'QL|3^'^^ chhu-tshb
nga-la cKa khye sho.
Do you take milk and sugar in your tea ? hon. Q'c^'^CI'g*
tang cKe-ma-l-a-ra yo-jie s'6-ja nga-mo sKe-hyi yo-pe :'
A little of each please. q2=n^''^'^yr]'^'qigc:-^-C^s^| Id
tok-tsa tok'tsa thung-gi-yij.
160 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
A Tibetan gentleman is coming to lunch with me to-morrow^
G^^]'J^(a^'Sn'5;f2^'Z^ CVJ^ ! sang-nijm pb-pe ku-tra chi
nge tsa-la nyin-gung sKe-la sKe-ga phe-pa-yo.
What is there to eat ? S'UsJ'^^'y^^'^ ! sa~ya la-re yo-pa ?
Matton, fowlsj eggs, Sir, and various kinds of vegetables.
c^^'^'cB^^'^s^^ ) ku-sKo s'6-trum InJi-sha cKa-tei-sha
sKe-gong tang sKe-tshe na-tsho yd.
Will the Tibetan gentleman eat English food'? hon. ^I^^'CJQ^'
fra Hi in-ji sKe-la sKe-yong~nge ?
Keep the kitchen thoroughly clean ! ^]^f^'i^'^'2:TI^C^'^^]''(^^'
2^'i3j^'(^^ so-tlfia'p tsang thaJc-chho cKe-ne sKo.
I want two bottles of milk a day as long as I stay here.
^^^'^^^">^^ I i^ga de do-pe gang-la nyi-ma re-la
o-ma she-tam nyi-nyi go-yb.
CHAPTEIi XA'I. 161
6. Time of the Day, Bays of the Week, Dates, Seasons, etc.
What o'clock is it ? ^''W'^'cB^'^'^^''^^ I 2^'«^^^-«f^ chhu-tsho
Ka-tsho re.
It is three o'clock, ^'^^s'^^^'^^ | chhu-tsho sum re.
It is half past ten. ^'cBS^'-^S'^C^'g^'Tj'^^ | chhu-tsho chu
fang chhe-J:a re.
It is a quarter past three. ^•aBS|'^g^'^C:'^'^'^'^^''^C:' |
chhu-tsho sum fang mi-li cho-nga song.
It is a quarter to five. ,§'^''g'^q'q'f^'l^'Si-q'5^fg'Q^2^q|
chhu-tsho nya lep-pa la mi-li cho-nya du.
What is the English date to-day ? ^'^ry^^'^'^'y^^'Cl ]
fe-ring ta-riJc Jca-tsho yim-pa ?
It is the twenty-fifth ! B'5^c;'l^-5;qi-S'^'§"fg''c^^ | fe-rmg
fa-riU nyi-shu-tse-nga yin.
What is the Tibetan date to-day? ^'^^C'^^'^IJ'S^'^'^^ |
fe ring tshe-ya lca-tsh'6 re ?
It IS the twenty-second ! ^''^C^''^'*fl'^'^^' -^^^ | fe-ring nyi-
shu-nyi re.
What day of the week is it ? ^'^C^'STiaQ.'^'-^'^^ I fe-ring
sa lea- re re ?
it is Thursday. ^''^C^'2TI3Q^'2:J^*^''^^ ! fe-ring sa phur-pu re.
i Note the differeuce bet\Yeen V"^'^ '^' ^"^ y-^'^"^^' (Cap. YIII,
para. 6).
11
162 TIBETAN GRAMMAE.
Where did you go to yesterday ? R^'p^'^'^'2lI'S(3;'q |
J:hy6 khr-sa Jca-pa chhim-pa ?
Don^t come to-morrow, but come the day after to-morrow. ^C^'
^(^'3^'J^C I (3\C^^'^(^'T['^ncn .sang-nyin ma-yong ;
nang-nyin-ka sho.
When it rains in the morning-, it always clears up in the
afternooD. "^^^'^^'(^^•q'gq-cgj ] 2;^'5]C:'^^2^'^^]-q^'
^"^^'5^^'^'^^'^'^^^ x/iO^'-^'<? chhar-pa gyap-na
gong-da tak-pa nam t'ang-po yong-gi-du.
It freezes hard at Phari during the whole winter and some
times snows even in summer. 5:y^l'^^'^cn5;'7T|*rocn^*q'
pha-re gun-ka khyak-pa gyak-ki du ; tsham-tsham
yar-ka yang kang gyak-ki.
To-day is the last day of the 2nd fourth month of the Wood-
Dragon year. ^•S.c^'^n^'Q^gqj'I'q'q^'qS^'^^'
q§^^'5)''^^'^^'^S I ^^"■'"^'^^9' shing-druk da-wa sKi-pe
nyi-tsak-kyi nam kang-re.
CHAPTER XVI. 163
7. The same continued.
Last moDth and this month the rain has been heavy, but it
will probably not rain very much next month. ^'^'
ica ng6?i-ma fang da-wa di-la chhar-jja sKe-tra gyap
cKung J cKe-tsang da-iua sKuJc-ma tela chhar-jpa mang-
po-rang bap-kyi min-dra.
There is a lot of mist during the summer. S9^'^'Sj^^'^'
^C^'Q.^^ yar-ka muk-pa mang-po du.
Will you meet him this evening ? |g^'^'^'^2:n~'p' ^^I'L^k'
C^ I khyo-ra fo gong klio thuk yong-nge ?
I cannot this evening, but perhaps to-morrow morning.
ysJC^' I to-gong thuk mi yong ; chik-cKe-na sang-sKo
nga-po thuk-yong.
The crops were bad last year and this year. Unless they
are good next year, there will be great distress.
^•^C(3j I ^^'^^'cS^'J^'^'"^^ 1 da-nying tang t'a-lo
fm-tho yak'po macHung ; chhi-lo yang yak-po ma-
cKung na kang men-tshe cKe-kyi-re.
Is my watch right ? C:^' ^'^S' Q^j^* Sf &3^'^^' (\^^ ^^ ]
nge chhu-tsho khor-lo ten-den duk-ke ?
164 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
No, it is ten minutes fast. ^'0^^271 ] ^'f^'^§^'^g^]^'Tf ?
min-du ; mi-li chil gyoH-Ha.
When did he leave here ? pa^^'3j^'2T]'2^^'^(3^'?rc:' | kho di-
7ie Jca-tii chhin-song .
From Lhasa to the Chumbi Valley is a fortnight^s journey.
gf^'(3j^'^Sr^^'^'q^(3j'=T]^^'^'i'ai5^'5,«;j | hla-sa ne
tro-mo par-la diin niji-lxyi lam re.
CHAPTER XVI. 165
8. The Weather.
What a strong wind ! ^Vf^5S'SI^^''^'c^'^ | din-dre hlalc-
pa tsha la.
What a cold day ! Q^§'Q^^q^'^(3j5^'^:;'C;'ai ] din-dre nam
t'rang-nga-la.
I feel quite warm. C:'"^^2T|'^'Q^^2T[ nga fro thalc-chhd du.
There was a heavy dew last nig-ht. ^^C;'^^C;^^<5S5^'0^'3(^'
^'5yC^'i]'i^^'Q^^S7i dang-gong tshen-la sil-pa mang-fo
pap-du.
It is misty ; we cannot see the snow mountains. ^^^'^'
thip-sKa ; ngan-tsho Hang-ri thong~gi min-du.
Do you think it will rain ? ^'cB^'q'^q'^C^'q^^'^'Q^^^^^'
^^ I kliyo chhar-pa gyap-yong sam-Hyi duU-He ?
It will probably be fine till midday. |a^'S^27JC;'q^'i=T]3j^'y^2^'
^rCVJC'^'yvl^j'^'Q^ ] nym-yung par nam yak-fo
yong-gi yim-pa-dra.
Will there be moonlight to-night ? ^^^•^cS^j'OI'J'^Tj^'
•^^'S'^S'^^ I '^^~9^^^9 ishen-la da-kar h-ha-Jcyi re-fe ?
There was heavy rain yesterday and a rainbow was visible.
166 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
3^'^C^' [ khe-sa chhar-pa mang-po pap-song ; te-'i-
jiik-laja chi suJc-song.
It IS raining a little. cB^*^'R^'^''^^''3]'Q^^^ chhar-pa tok-
tsa pap'kyi du.
The rain has stopped. ^^'^'(^^'^TQ' | chhar-fa chhe-song,
A storm is coming up. S^'^^'^^^'^C^'cn'Q^^ZTI lung-
tshup chi lang-gi-du.
Did you see the lightning? j|^'"^^' J^'^'^'^'SC^T^ ]
lihyd lo-gyap-pa thong-cKung-nge ?
I heard thunder. C;^'Q^gR]'^^':^q'q'qrgC ] nge druK-ke
gyap-pa Ho-cliung.
It won't freeze to-night, because it is cloudy. ^](5^'Q.^^^'
nam thip du ; cKe-tsany fo-gong tshen-la Jihyalc-pa
chha-kyi ma-re.
CHAPTER XVI. 167
9. Conversation irith the teacher, hoii.
Please speak slowly, ^j'q'^^''^^'^^^'^^'^'^^' I ^^'^^
cKe-ne sung-ro nang.
Please speak louder. ^^^ ^^'(^'^'^TI^C:'^^ '^^jC:- 1
sung -he chhe-tsa sung-ro -nang.
What is lie saying ? Sc;'§j^'2^'?.'^^C:'^"a^^^ khong-gi
lia-7'e sung-gi-du !
I do not know. C2^'siC|^'nn'5^^ | nge skmy-gi me.
Did I say that correctly ? C:^'?'§I'^^'^f^^'?fc'C;^ ] nge
t'e dra-taJc-'po lap song-nge.
We will read this letter. C-^^^C^'^^Tj^^'g^l'^^'Q^^'^'CIl'
^|3JCQ^ [ nga-rang-nyi chha-ri di lolc-lca nang-do.
This is easy. q^^'q^^-g-'Hf ^^ | di le-la-yo re.
I made a lot of mistakes. !::^'5^C;'Hf"^'^i:;' | nge mang-
fo nor-song.
I could not understand him ; he spoke the Sikkiraese dialect.
gC I khb dren-jong ke lap tsang, nge kho ke-chha ha-
ko nia-cHung.
Please arrauge for a dandywala to come to me for an hour
every day. qq-2^2C;-C;'cr]S=T]'§'^'5,' ^'^'^'^'q^^*
168 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
■phep-chang-nga chi chhu-tsho re-re nyi-ma-re sKin nge
tsa-la yony go re se ka nang-ro-nang.
It is essential that he should be a Lhasa man. 'g'^''^C^'^]'
^'-5^'^^^'^'^^ I hJe-sa rany-gi mi chi go-ica-yo.
Please ask him to tell me stories. Cp^'^C^V^^'^TI^C^'-^^]^'
NO
^1^[^' I nga liho drung sho sung-ro-nang.
It is of no use trying to read this ; it is too difficult. '^§'^'
C^^rqij Q^J-^ma^'ai^'pqj'Hr?!^ I ts'6n-dru-cKe ne di
loJc-ne phen Hang-yang thoTi-Hi min-du ; di ka-le-hhoH-
IJO re.
I am sorry I am late ; I met an acquaintance on the way
{lit. I met an acquaintance on the way ; therefore I
am late. Please do not be angry). CS:C(II5\|'Qcncn'
C|'5^'^fl&C^ I nga- fang lang-ga la ngo-she chi fhulc-
cKiiuy ; cKe-tsang chhi-po cKesong gong-pa ma-tshung.
That is enough for to-day. ^'^C^'^'CTI^'KjC^'C;' f te-ring t'a-
He yony -nga.
CHAPTER XVI.
10. Relatives.
]69
She is my niece. '^'C:^'c^*^''y^<3j | mo nge tsha-mo yin.
I have two younger brothers C:q^'|j^'§^'^' (^') ^^^'^^|
nge imn-chhung-nga nyi y'6.
These two are brother and sister. ^^'^^^'H'^'IJ^''^*^ ]
di nyi pun-kya re.
How many nephews have yon ? g^'OI'cB' R' ^'^^'^^ ]
khyo-la fsha wo Ha-tshb y'6 ^
My younger sister died three years ago. C^Q' ^(3\' ^^' R'^'
mo chhiing-nga t'rong-ne lo sum song.
His elder sister is my maternal aunt, p Q.'^'(^'C^'5J'3^'
C^^ I kho achhe nge su-mo yin.
Their daughter was married to Tshering's adopted son.
kho-nyi kyi pnmo tshe-ring-gi so-thrulc la na-ma te
sonq.
My son married his daughter. C^C^^'^^'TO Q^'^'^'3^I(9j(^•^•al(3j
^C^' I nge pit kho pu-mo na-ma len-song.
Her grandfather is my paternal uncle. ^ Q^'^ Q^'CQ^'I^'
CV 7 7-
P'^sJcR I mo 2^0 nge a-ktiu yin.
NO
I and 2 Usually however ^3^'3,^' though meaning also brother, sister,
cousin is used for nephew and niece also.
170 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Only a few of my relatives live in Darjeeling, but I have a
large number of acquaintances there. C^d'^'^'ra'sH^"
nge nye-wa kha she-chi Dor-je-ling-la do-Icy i-y 6 ; yin-
na-yang ngo-she mang-fo yo.
CHAPTER XVI. 171
11. On the March.
Let us start now; it is getting Jate. ^'CZ'^'Q^^'^'y^<3| I'
g'CJ'q;^"rn''^^ | fa ngan-tsho dro-liyi-yin ; chhi-'po cKi-
hyi re.
That box is very heavy ; will the cooly be able to carry it ?
gam-€e ji thali-chho-du ; mi-hrang-gi Ichye-thup a-
yong ?
Tell the syces to saddle the ponies and bring them round at
once. Sq^'=^q^'q'^S^-||'qgq'5j^-^'^a|5^- ^C' |^-
C^ra^'^cn'taj^ I chhiJc-pon-la te-ya gyap-rte ta-tsho lam-
sang tsh'ii-thri-sho lap.
It rained heavily last night; the road will be very muddy.
Q^mqi'q'gq'S'gqi'E^C;'cn''?^^ | dang-gong tshen-la
chha-fa sKe-tra gyap-cKung ; cKe-tsang lang-ga la
dzap sHe-tra yong-gi-re.
There is no wind ; so it will not be cold. ^''W'S^^^'^'z?!^'
tan-da hlalc-pa gyaJc-Jci min-du ; cKe-tsang nam frang'
mo yong-nga min-du.
What is the road like ? 0^3^' ^^^' ^^' '^^' ^ ^5^' ^^^
lang-ga de-Id Tian-dre du ?
172
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Which is the best road '^ a]3^'Q^=F|cn' L^qj'3^' ^' ^'^' Q^^CT]
lang-ga yaJi-sh'6 t'e Jca-Jci du ■
To-day's march is down hill, "^'^^c;' ^' a5]*^ ' ^^ ' ^^n |
fe-riiig-gi dro-sa thur re.
It is steep up hill. ^(5:'cr|3^'*Hfr:^s:cn Icyen sar-po du.
The servants and coolies have gone on ahead. (Sqi^'S'^^C:'!^'
^^'c^'^<5v'(^'g^'^C^' I sKap-chhi fang mi-hrangtsho
ngen-la chhin song.
They will reach Kalimpong before you do, Sir. qTIQ'^'
N© NO
'pung-la ku-sKo ma yhep Hong-la khon-tsho lep-yong.
We have nearly arrived. ^'(^'^I^'^^WS I ngan-tsho lep
tro yd.
The bedding is wet. ^':^'(^^'§C;^'q(Sq| nge-chhe bang sKa.
Light a fire and dry it. ^'^'^C;'(3;^'^5;j | me-tang-ne kavi.
How much a day are you paying each cooly ? jS^'^^'^a^'gll'
^•a]'^r^C;'^'q'g]'qj'(^5:'gi:*/^-y^C I M^/o-re nyi-ma-rt-
la mi-hrang re-la la Ha-tshb tro-kyi yd.
Eight annas each a day ; they would not come for less. ^5J
y\IC^'cn'5^'Q^^cn nyi-ma-re-la la anna gye-gye trc'^yi
yd ; t'e ma-tre-pa khon-tsho yong-gi min-dii.
CHAPTER XVI. 173
What time shall we start to morrow ? ^C^'C^'^'^'cB^'^'(^^*
f^'Q.^^'^ >''C(>'ng ngan-tsho chhu-tshb Ha-tshb la thon-ga ^
Let us start very early before the snow becomes soft. (^^^'
nga-po Jiang ma-shu Hong-ne iiyan-fsho dro-t'o.
174 TIBKTAX GRAMMAK.
12. The same continued.
Have my bagorage mules arrived ' Ca'p(lJ'2sa]'(55'q?.Tq^'
^C^'CZ^ I '^lyf^ khe-t're-tsho lep cKiing-nge ?
What must I pay for each riding mule from here to Phari ?
^^^'!I]''^SI ^^^"^^^^ yha-ri fhuJc nge shon-t're re-la taj>-
la Ixi-tsho tre g'6-l'yi re.
Is it safe to ride over this bridge ? 35^'q'a^^5'|^C;-qr'q^'
^^'S^''^'^^'^^*^^'^^'^^ 1 *'»''^-2^« <^^*-^" gang-la ta
sKon-ne chhin-na Jcai die mi yong-nge /
I am going on ahead. C^^^'P^'Q.^'cn'C\!(3J | nga ng en-la dro-
kyi-yin.
I am returning in a few days. C^'^'P'^^l'^^^'f^'^^'
y\^CZ'2TI'l\I3j ] nga nyi-ma kha-she-chi-la loh yong-yi-yin.
I have forgotten to bring any money with me. C^^'^C^O^'
^^^^*^TC;'g'|^'(^^'5^'Q^^2T] nge ngu khe-yong-gyu je-
ne mm-du.
Is this the road for Petnionchi ? C] 2N'^qCZ^*g"(^^rn*^Q^*a,1^'
Q.qi=T|'Q. ^''3;,2:-q^ I j^^-ma-yangtse dro-se lang-ga di
re-pe /
JMy pony is limping; see whether it has a stone in any of
its shoes {lit. in its hoof). ^CH^^'e'Q^^Q^'rflC^'Q^R^'^'
CHAPTER XVI. 175
IiJiyo-Jci du ; milc-pa la do yo-me-t'o.
Go slowly ; the road is slippery hon. {lit. there will be a
slipping on the road). CTj'aj-cn-aj'g^'avS^-^q^ | ^q*
a]5^'Cq'(Sq^'C;^^^'^^'y^C;' | Im-le Jca-le cKe~ne fhe ;
jphep-lam la sKapdre shoyong.
Please tell ray syce to hurry aiid catch me up [lit. to catch
my tracks (juickly and come). C^Q^'^^q^'^qc^J'
^^qi^rZfi^ • 3^ • q-^ • ^^U 'T^^' ^3jC: • I nge
chhiJc-pon yyoJc-po je-sijii-jja sho suny-ro-nang.
I am going to halt here a short time and rest our ponies.
nga de foU-tsa de-ne ta-t.sho nge-so gyali-ru ckuk-lii-yin.
Bring me one of those flowers to look at ! {lit. pluck and
bring one of those flowers ; I will look at it).
2sC* I C^'5^2T|''^'qi'L^<3j I I'ha-gi me-to te-tsho nany-ne
chi tofi-ne khye-sao-tang, nga mik ta-Jcyi-yiii.
Cut me a switch from the road-side bashes^ as I have not
got a whip. c:'q'£'|T2T]-^T:^'^C;- ] C^^' ^' §^' §' ^ZJ
§C:'^C:'q'3^^'^C;-|=T]'^§^'q^2^'^^'(^l2^'-^ nga~la
te-cha me-tsang, lam-kyi sur-lcyi shing chhung-chhtivg
pha-ne chany-nyulc chi che-ne Ichye-sho.
176 TIBETA>7 GRAMMAR.
I will call on you when I return from Mongolia. C^'^ZT]'Us|aj'
soJc-yul ne khor-tsham khye tang je chhoJc-ka sKu-go.
CHAPTER XVI. 177
13. The same continued.
Is there much snow on the pass ? 0^'f^'^C^^'(^'^'Q^s:q]'27]^ |
NO
la Id ]ca7ig sKe-po dulv-Jce ?
There is not much on the pass itself, but there is rather more
on the way up to it (lit. before arriving). Q^''^Q'aj'
rang In sKe-po-rang min-du ; lep-lep Hong-la tolc-tsa
chhe-a du.
How far (lit. how much to go) is the nearest village from
here ? a^5'a^^*gt'^^q'^^'f'^^'f^'^^g'^'^^"3^^
di-ne t'rong-se thaJc-nye-sho-ld dro-gyu Ha tsho yd.
It is quite near, Sir. qzTj^'^J^y^^'S^'Kfs^ ] Id thalc-nye
thalc-chhd yd.
It is a long way. Sir. (^2^^"£]2q^''^C;'^'w;^^ | Id tha-ring-po
yd.
It is a moderate distance. Sir. q^|^'Q^gc;'-5^' V^^ ] Id
dring-chi yd.
It is a day's journey, Sir. Cq27|^rOT'HrSq]'§]'^'Sk J Id
sKuJc-po chile 'Jci sa yd.
It is a three or four hours' journey, Sir. ^27|^'^'Q^S;[cn-^cn'
2Tl'^'ys|^ I Id tsa-pho chik-Jci sa-yd.
2 n]c.-5^3^5^^'^q|' may be substituted for i5.gc.'^i|'. Both are commonly
used.
12
178 TIBKTAN GRAMMAR.
How many houses are there in the village ? ^C'^^^'^Ci*
5jC^'0^'2T[C;'i^'^]'cB^^*y^^ I t'rong-se te-'l nang-la trong-pa
Ha-tsho yb ?
I cannot say exactly, Sir. CLJ^^'C^'£(^''gI<3v'®'y^'^^ | Id nga
ten- den sKu-ya me.
How many approximately {lit. by guess) ? ^r'ac'^T'cn'^^r-
y^^ I tsho-cKe-na Jta-tsho yd ?
How many adult men and women are there in the village ?
^C;'2^^q-^'q'Cl^^'q'*^C'^^-^'q|'^'5[2^ | trong-se
fe~la slxom-pa tang sKon-ma lca-tsh'6 yd.
How many monks are there in that monastery up there ?
y^'§j'^^'q'^'a^'g*^'^'^=^'Sj2^ I y^^'^ gom-pa t'e-la
<
tra-pa Jca-tsho yd.
What provisions are obtainable in this place ? f^C^'5^^^*
( ^^'5' ) 3'y^'2^;5,'CT|-^-C;^|^'5^C:'' I Ung-pa de sa-ya
fca-re Ica-re jor-yong.
Yak^s flesh, Sir, mutton, pork, fowls, eggs, wheat, barley,
barley-flour, potatoes, turnips, radishes are all obtain-
able. ^^]'^'f^^]-^-qq]-.i:[-5'y^C:-g^3j^-§'^-q-^5^^
^o ^ __^
1 Lit. There is not to me the saying accurately. Note the use of Q'^J'
(Cap. VI, para. 24).
^ Lit. What provisions will be obtained in the country here ?
3 Qio]^' is often spoken inside the sentence instead of at the begin-
ning.
* These are the kinds of provisions commonly obtainable in the TJ
(Lhasa) and Tsang (Shigatse) provinces.
CHAPTER XVI. 179
luJc-sha phaJc'sha cKa-te go-nga fro ne tsam-pa sKo-Ho
nyung-ma la-phu cKe Id t'e-gije jor-yong.
What is the road like from here to G-yantse ? Q5:'(3J^'^G^'
^*q^'aj?^'T['^^'ai^'Cn'Q^5^T'S^^ | di-ne gyan-tse par
lang-ga de-lo Han-dre yd ?
-Can laden ponies and laden mules travel over it ? pf^'5^'£'
^C^'^'fl^l'S^'ni'^^'C]^ I khe-ma ta-tang t're dro
thup-kyi re-pe ?
Is there any short cut ? ^^^•q5^'Q^^^'iMC;'C:^ I| gyolc-
lam dro-sa yong-nge ?
i Lit. from here as far as Gyantse what kiudjDf goodness has the
road? ci^'5' is somewhat commoner than ^^'^ in the sense of good
as applied to a road, but "^^'5' can also be used.
180 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
14. Crossing a river.
How broad is that stream over there ? ^'^'(3B'^Q.'(^C^' ( ^Q' )
(^•aj^'J7|'Q^2r^'Q rcn i pha-gi chhu t'e-i sHang chhe-lo
Ican-dre du.
It is not very broad, Sir. qqi^'ielC;' (^C;*) (^^^'q^^C'^l^'
Q^: Jin I la sHang-clihem-jpo-rang min-du.
Are there any boats where the road meets it ? {Lit. the
road and stream meeting-place, there are boats ?)
^•5;c;'f:i]^'g2^'^'s^2^' (?^' ) nyq-'^s^-q^ j chhu tang
lam thuli'Sa t'e ko-wa yo-^^e ?
No, Sir. f2^^^'ysIS'^'^''^S ! i^ yo-ica-ma-re.
How do people get across ? {Lit. how does one cross the
stream and arrive at the farther side ? ^'^Q '5;J^'gcn^
^'^'^S'S^'^^^^'pt^'!!!'^^ I ^^^^^^ fe-'i pha-chho-la Ican-
dre cKe-ne lep-kyi-re ?
There is a ford if you go a little lower down. ^^'-5' ( ^3^' \
C'Cn'S:|i^'(5\'''^^'^^'ys]^ I ma-tsa ta-lzafhep-na rap-chi-
y'6.
I ^c joined to a negative means not lery and is very commonly used
in this way. So also 5Jz:.'q'^c.'?i'Q,^a| | ihere are not very many.
^ ^'^' means a boat made of hide. For a boat made of wood use 5]'
s Note the hon. ^^'^' instead of ^^'^' If the Tibetan is a townsman
or has any education he will use the higher lioji. '^S^'^'^\5^t^'Sc
CHAPTER XVI. 181
Whose foot-prints are these ? ^^^^'^^^'S^'^S I ^^
hang-je re ?
I do not know, Sir. fl^^^'^A^'n]'5^^ | la shmg-gx me.
If jou speak the truths I will give you bakshish ; if you tell
(me) a lie, you will get into trouble (lit. it will not be
good for you). 5jT^' 3^^' q^2^'<3j-C:^'g^'q-£(3j-q-^^-
she-na nge khyo-la ngem-pa te-Jcyi-yin j ham-pa she-na
khyo-la yaJc-po mi-yong.
They are only the foot-prints of traders coming from
Shigatse. a^^'5T|^^'^-§'3^^'E^u:'5^p(3j'2|-^C:'q§^'rf|C:'
s^'^'^cn'^C I di sKi-ga-tse-ne yong-khen-lcyi tshong-
■pe hang-je sha-ta re.
How deep is this water ? {Lit. this water depth how much is.)
^•a^^'^j^C:*?^C;'^Z'^'^'2;^'Q^^^ chUu-di ting ring-
thung lca-tsh'6-du ?
It is about (up to one's) waist, Sir. f^l^iH^'Tfl^'^'^' ( ■^^' )
^^'STI'Q^^I Id ke-pa tsa gyak-Jci-du.
What sort of a road is there by the ford {lit. at the ford-
existing-place) ? ^q'KK'^'q'qS^^TI'^l-Q^^^'S^^'q | rah
yb-sa-la lang-ga kan-dre yo-pa ?
On this side it is rock : on the other side it is all mud. (3b^'
1 3,*^'^^' may be used instead of ^*''^'
182 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
chho-la tra yd pha-chho-la dam sha-ta yd.
Is there a bridge across that stream over there ? S:J'£T|'(^'{1J'"
3^'i^'LV|^'SJ^ f pha-gi chhu-la sam-pa yo-pe ?
Yes, Sir. OJ^j^'U^^ j Id yd.
Is it a good one ? y^^l'^'y^Js'^^ | yaU-po yo-pe ?
It is shaky and narrow (lit. it shakes and its breadth is
small). Ponies cannot cross by it {lit. there is no
passage for poDies). ajqi^'S?^' (^^' q^' ^' U^^' (SjC
dem-dem cKe-kyi-yo ; sKang-ka yang chhung-cKhung
yin ; chhiJc-pa thar-sa me.
i q^-q- is commonly used in the sense of " to be passable," e.g., "!*'*
Tl'^V^'S^'i^s^ni f the road is not passable {i.e., too rough to march along^
or blocked by snow, boulders, etc.).
CHAPTER XVI. 183
15. Talking to persons on the road.
Where have you come from ? |g^'2Tl'3J^'y<|C^'CZ' ] hhyo Ha-
ne yong-nga ?
I have come from Rhenok. C'S,' &^ 5^' "^Z^Z: (^^ \ ^<3j |
nga ri-naJc ne yong-nga yin.
What is there in those loads ? Tqj'g2:*?*^§|' ^jC;' q* OT ^'
ysj^'^ I doJc-thre fe-tsho nang-la Ica-re yd-j)a ?
Cotton Cloth in these sacks and cups^ soap, matches and
miscellaneous goods m those boxes. 5;J^'cnzTI'Q^'(^ Q •
g'3'^C;'^'(^2:n'^-^'q|:^'y^r t phe-Jco di-tshb nang-la
re-chha fang, gam fe-tsho nang-la ka-yo tang yi-tse
mu-si tang cha-la na-tsho yd.
No, I am not a Tibetan, Sir, I am a Bhutanese. ^^^'§J'
po-pa min, nga driilc-pa yin.
Where are you going to ? RS'^'^'^^'^'^'^J'CJ | kliyo Tea-
'pa dro-ki-yim-pa ?
I am going on pilgrimage to India. C^'^^'^<3J^'^^*f2^'
Cini'cn'ysj^ 1 ^^^ gya-ka ne-kor-la dro-ki yin.
What places will you visit ? j2k'^]3;^'^l-^'S^":T|-a^^'§j'y5^ j
khyo ne ka-re ko-ga dro-ki yin.
184 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
I shall go to Bodli Gaya and Benares. C^W^TI^'?' S'^^^J'
^C^'Q'^''^'^'^'^^'^'^^ I '"'9^ gya-Jca dor-je-den
fang wa-ra-na-si la dro-Jci yin.
Please give me some bakshish, Sir. ^'^(5)^^ | E^'f^'^^f^^'
^^•■^•^•cnajC^'X^i^'cria^C;' I ku-sKo nga-Ia sb-re tol-
tsa nang-ro-nang.
Are you taking those sheep to Darjeeling? R^'^^'S'
^'r'|'^C;'aj'^^''Q^^§j'y5^'q^ ] hhyo luk fe-tsho
Bor-je-ling la fe dro-Hi ywi-pe ?
Is this one of the halting places for mules carrying wool to
Kalimpong ? q^TjO^ ' §^' U ^' ^' ^^' ^B^'^^^P^''
5^'cB'S^*^'^'cB*2^5^'P^^'^^'q^ I Jca-ldn.pu7ig la pe
khye-dro-lhen tre-tsho do-sa sa-cha cM di re-pe ?
Who lives in that house ? ^T^' q|^' S'^^^' ^'^^'^'^^ I
nang pha-ge su de-kyi yo-ica-re /
1 For one or two sheep '^§'>,''^5]'C1' to lead, would be used; for a
larger number ^'S''^^'^' ^^ ^five, as above.
^ The postposition ^', denoting the genitive, is sometimes dropped
for the sake of brevity.
CHAPTER XVI. 185
16. General enquiries by an Interpreter in the field.
Are there any soldiers behind that hill? SiJ'cn' ^Q'jSfiq'
fjj'rg^jqi'^'y^^'q^ | pha-gi ri-'l gyap-la mali-mi yo-pe ?
Have they all got guns ? p'^§|C;'p-aj'iJ'5^^a,- Sk' q^ |
hho7i'tsho gang-Jcha-la men-da yo-pe ?
The majority of them have got swords and spears only.
^Z:Z: (q-) aj-^-2^C;'5^^C:'^'2^q]'2^5^ ] mang-ngala
fri-fang dung sha-ta y'6.
Some of them have bows and arrows, p' 4V^' ^' ^^^' ^®'
^K I kha-she la da-sKu yd.
Will the arrows be poisoned ? S^^f^'f^'-^^Tl'^q'Kf^'q'^^'q^ |
da-la t'uk gyap yo-wa re-pe ?
Yes, with aconite poison. aj^|^'5,^'q^(3:'^2Tl'^q'L^5:'q'^^ f
Id-re tsen-tuH gyap yo-wa-re.
Have they any cavalry with them ? S" (^'a|'£'^5^2^'5K'^^ I
khon-tsho-la ta-ma yo-pe ?
Not at present, but I heard a noise like that of ponies coming
in the distance. G^^^'^'f^'iJ^ [ £'i^z^'?.C:'2f^||q]"
3j^'Sfc;-q]'C^s;j'q'Q^5'Hfq|lqi-qygC;' I U tan-da we;
ta tha-ring-po chi-ne yong~gi yo-pa dra-po chi Tio-cKung
Have the soldiers built a wall ? ^^^^'^'^'cB^'ORC^'^'^qa^'
^C^'C^^ I maJc-mi t'e-tsho dzing-ra so song-nge ?
I A fortified wall. 1^^'^' is not used for wall in this sense.
186 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Yes, about so high (indicating his breast), o^qij^' ffqi' qi- ^-
( ^^' ) qr ( gr ) p] • 5^"^- of^-^- ( ^^- ) qa^-?fc:' [
Id tali-lca-tsa pang-kho tho-l'6-tsa so-song.
How far does the wall extend to the east of the road ? 0\^'
shar-chho kyi dzing-ra, Ica-re par-tu du.
About as far as that mule over there carrying shovels.
^' ^' 5' ^^^' ^' f^P^' ^^' 5^P^* ^^' ^' ^' (^^')
^^^'^'y^I^ 1 1 pha-gi fre ja-ma khur-yoiig-lxhen faJc-
Ica-tsa chi'la yd.
^ Here ^'^' has the sense of ^'CJ' Either may be used.
CHAPTER XVI. 187
17. The same continued.
Is it the custom of the Tibetans to attack at night ? i^^'CJ2^'
tshen-thi gyap-ye luJc-so yo-wa re-pe ?
Yes, Sir. f^J^^'g^Tl^'^'^k'SJ'?,^ | Id luk-so yo-wa-re.
What sort of cannon have they got ? p' cB ^'^'g^^*^'^5^^
U^^ I khon-tsho me-gyo lian-dre yd ?
About how far will they carry ? [lit, to about what dis-
tance will the cannon-balls arrive ?) 5^'§|2:T]^'n]'5^^Qs'
gcT]'^C:-5j^"ST|'q]'^' (^^') "^^'V^Z: ] me-gyo kyi di-u
thalz-ring-1'6 Ha-Ha-tsa lejp-yong.
How did they get their cannon across the river ? ^'^^]^'^*
^§'^'^'^5l'3^'^^'^il^'^^'^' (q-) ^^1 me-gyo
te-tsho chhu-la lian-dre cHe-ne Jche yong-nga-re?
All arms must be handed in to me {lit. bring all arms to me)
before noon to-morrow. ^^'-S^sC^'^'S^t^c^'cB'ljC'P'^C;'
^aj'cnc;'S[p'q'C;^"g''a^'Q^g^'^ | khyo-rang-tsho
tshon-chha gang-kha sang nyin-kung Hong-la nge tsa-
la khe-sho.
Anybody who is found in possession of arms after that will
be severely punished. ^®^'f^'^Q^'g"<3j^'^cB(3;' (3B*
1 wa^a^-l^q- (wia^-^q-j = night-attack.
188
TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
(^^^•^'^^•q'^^j-q-qE^C;- (^^Q') ^'^<3jl sKu-lasu
tsa-ne tshoii-chha thon^na nye-pa chhein-po tang-gi-yin.
CHAPTER XVI. 18^
18. Buymg supplies for troops.
1 -^
Have you any grain and grass to sell ? Q^g* ^^'^^^^'^^
CA]^'^^ I d'^"^ fang tsa tshouQ-gyu yo-pe ?
I will pay you two-and-a-half tranff-kas per bo for it. I
have brought the money with roe (showing it). ^9*
C^'S^Cq^Sqs^^' (O^^-^-) Q^jl^'Kr^l clru ho re-la ring
t'rang-ka chhe-t'ang sum-sum trd-Jcyi-yin ; nge ngu de
khe-yo.
The grain and grass are in that village .ip there. I cannot
bring it down, q^^^'a^g'^^c:-^'^^'^]'^:;' q-q'5f^^'q'
5,^1 C:^'5^^'^]5^'S7c:'^^*5'5^'5,^ | ^^^ dru tang tsa
ya-lii t'rong-pa lei yo-iva-re ; nge ma khe-yong thup-kyi
ma-re.
Never mind ! I can have it fetched. {Lit. I can send the
carriers). I5^(^'f •a^||^'^p5j'C:^'q'^q' (^"^*) ^
au-tse khe-'khen nge tang-cKho.
No violence will be shown to anybody. ^I'D^'UsjC^'^qC^'y^^'
g^T'^'y^C^M su-la-yang wang-yo cKe-miyong.
1 Grain for animals = *^' ; that for men = f^^'
^ 1 bo = about I of a maund ; 1 trang-ka = i of a rupee. The-
maund (pronounced in Tibetan mun) is not generally understood by
Tibetans other than those that trade in British territory.
5 j^qc'^e^' = Hind, Zabardasti.
190 TIBETAN GEAMMAE.
Please, Sir, pay me for the fodder now. ^' ^(e^^^'^g^cB^'
2T]''^(9;'^'^'TOC;''^2:T]^'^<3jC;'| kii-sKo tsa-chha-M ring
fan-da nang-ro-nang.
No ! I will pay you when I get the fodder, ^'f^'^^' ^' 5}(3j'
t'an-da tro-kyi-men ; tsa-chha dejor-ne tro-kyi-yin.
I %'S^^- = lit. grass and grain.
CHAPTER XVI,
19. T/ie same continued.
Can I get any fuel here ? 5^5^^' (^Y^') ^'"^^'^3^'
g*.^^'^^ I de meshing J or-kyi re-pe ?
Not even yak-dung ? ^ ( |-q- ) U^C^'Q^ ji^'^j'STc^'C::^ J
cho-yang jor mi-yong-nge ?
There is a little yak-dung, but we shall burn it ourselves ;
it is not for sale. ^ ( |'q )"^'^'Kf2^V^C'-^C:'^§|'^'
2^"^'CAI'5^'qj^^-qq|^-'Q^^'UsI-^^^ j cho tol-tsa yd-
t'e nga-rang-tsho me tong-ya ma-to Id tshong-ya me.
If you do not tell me where it is I shall search your house.
( f^cB^' ) 51'^^ I ^'^^ fca-pa yd ma-lap-na nge khang-
pe nang-la tshe-Jcyi yin.
I shall pay you for it in any case. ^'*^'3^'^' y^C^''^^'?JS'3'
ysj(3k ! Ica-re cKe-na-yang ring trb-kyi-yin.
It is against our orders to take things without paying for
i ^' has here the sense of hut, in spite of.
a Note the second QjajN* It is put in because this is really a second
sentence.
S Lit. Apart from what we burn ourselves there is none for sale.
* Lit, Whatever he done, i.e., whether you sell willingly or I take
forcibly.
192 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
them. ?:'a5-^'|:^'q'q-a}5j-Iq]'CT|Q^- ( qq^' ) qT[(^^-^^' }■
ring ma-tre-'pa-la leii chholc-lce ha me.
You will make a large profit, and will be able to live in com-
fort without working. g=;' -^c;' 0^' p' qac;* i^a^'Sr^c;'
y^C^'^'-^^ [| khyo-rang-la khep-sang chhem-po yong-gi-
re; le-ha cKe mi-go-wa-la kyi-po cKe-ne do-gyu yong-
gi-re.
i Lit. There is no order allowing to take on the non-payment of
the price.
CHAPTER XVI. 193
20. The same continued.
I want to buy fifty donkeys. They must all be sound and
strong, gc^' (Sc;'^') |5j-^^'q's^2^-iry^^|''Hf^-
^cn-(^-q^-^5;|'q-C;^-^'q|'y>](3^ | pung-gu kydn-me-pa
she-mo yalc-po sha-ta ngap-chu tham-pa nye nyo-Jci-
yin.
Only twenty of tliese are fit to carry loads. Q^^Ci'^C^'(3J^'^'
^•^•qj^^'poi'O^p^'^q'q'li'Q^^^' I di-'^ nang-ne
nyi-shu ma-to khe khur thup-pa min-du.
How old is that sheep ? f^^'^':?l^'^^''^'^5'^S ] l^f^^-t'^
gen-sUon Izan-dre re.
I will pick out thirty of them and give you ninety rupees
for the lot. ^•^§^'(5jC:'3j^-^3iJ'§' Q^^^^J^fa^^^'^^' '^^'
nang-ne sum-chu dam-ne ring gang-kha dom~ne gor-mo
gup-chu tham-pa tro-kyi-yin.
Go and bring all the grain and vegetables that you can get
hold of. a^|-=^c-cg^-^-«5'3C-<^'5^^^' C^'^'^) ^i^'
•^^ I dru fang tshe lia-tsh'6 cKung-na de khe-sho.
The owners will be well paid, qs^qi' Hf ^' q'^(5:';^q|'Hf^'
T]*ys]c3kn dak-po tsho-la ring yalc-po tro-kyi-yin.
^ Or ^q-g'^'^c^'
2 ^i^'iqj^Sj' = age ; lit. old-young. See Cap. HI, para. 1.
3 ||c.-|>vq^5^^-3\^- = lit. having added all together, i.e., in the total.
O
194 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
21. Buying meat in the bazaar.
How far is it from here to the bazaar ? Q^Sv'^j^'jg^^'OJ'^^'^C;'
a]^'2TI'c^^'y^^ I di-ne throm-la tha-ring-1'6 Ha-tsho yd ?
It is close by. q=I]^*^^'^^y^'yT^ ] lei phep-tha nye-po
yd.
(On arrival) Here is.the bazaar. q^^'j^Sq'^^^I' ( ^^'5)
^2n1 Id throrti de re.
Is there no other bazaar besides this one ? ra^' Q^^' ^^j'^I^J'
m(S5:'Us]^'CJ'5^'^^'2|^ I throm di mem-'pa sKen yo ica
ma-re-pe ?
There is no other, Cq^^'=^(^^'^'2if^'^'5^'^2^ | Id sKem-pa
yo-wa ma-re.
Where is the butcher ? ^'^Cl'S^p^'^qi'q'CM^'q'^^^ | sha-
tshong-khen Tia-pa yo-wa-re ?
He is just over there. f^^^'5;I'2:r|'^^ | Id pha-gi re.
(To the butcher.) What meat have you for sale ? pj^'^'^'qi"
^'(^cBCWy^^'^ I khyd sha Ha-re tshong-gyu yo-jm ?
1 Hon. for gaj-yq- So also ^q''2i34' for QI^'T]* road and several others.
a ^3\'q' the actual word for butcher is avoided as far as possible
since it involves some opprobrium. Similarly *<il^'V ( ^' ) for black-
smith which should not be used in a blacksmith's presence, but *^5'^^*^'
{lit. head-man) substituted for it.
s The '21' after ^\ is omitted (See Cap. V, para. 15).
CHAPTER XVI. 195
I have mutton and yak's meat. n^^^'(^^Va'^C;'(3S^'^'U<^ |
Id lulc-sha fang tshaJc-sha yd.
What is the price of a leg of mutton ? (^^'-^'^(pj'glC^'Ol'^C^'
^'cB^'^'^v'CJ I luTi-sha sKi-Ung-la Hong Jca-tsho yim-pa ?
Two sh'o [i.e., five annas, four pies). a^JTi:^'(S' ^^3i | Id sKo-t'o
yin.
Very well, I will buy a leg of mutton. ^'^'C^^'^lfCglC^*^^'
^'cn'y^(3k ]| O-na nge sKi-Ung chi nyo-Jci-yin.
196 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
22. Buying a turquoise.
Have you any turquoises for sale ? R^'^^^'^cBC^'ct' '^R'
^^ I Ichyo yu tshong-gyu yo-pe ?
Yes, Sir. q^j^sI'S^^^ ] Id yo.
Have you any good ones ? y^m'^'l^^^'i:]^ | yalc-po yo-pe ?
Yes, Sir ; I have excellent ones. qq|^'y^qf|'^qi'^' y^c |
Id ya-thalc-chho yd.
What is the price of this one ? Q^^(^'271C;'^l'^^'y^<3J'j::j [ dt-%
Hong Im-tsKo yim-pa ?
Three sang, Sir, (five rupees). (^STj^-gc:;' qi^^'C^a: ] Id saiig-
sum yin.
Tell the correct price. fa^'f^^J'OJ^^ 1 ten-den lap.
How much will you give. Sir ? ^- ^IT]^^' ^^' z^' ^' 27|?Jaj-
^^'Z715JC'y<CC^' I hii-sKo'hyi Ha-tsho so-re nang-yong-
nga ?
Make it ten trang-kas (two rupees, eight annas). p'TI'^^g'g^'
A Lit. to he sold.
2 qq|''?^«;^' is added to many adjectives to denote very; e.g., ^'^2J|'1^^'
very great.
^ One sang = six trang-kas and one sh'o = one rupee, ten annas,
eight pies.
4 Ji|?5aj'^^'«i|3^c.'q' is h. hon. of l^q' to give. The ordinary ho7i. is
CHAPTER XVI. 197
That price does not quite suit. Please give me a little more
than that. flCll^'Sjt"^^-"^-^' {^^^y^Mt'C;' (q") li'
tsa yong-nga min-du ; t'e-ne tolc-tsa pa-ro-nang.
Well, make it two sang (three rupees, five annas, four pies).
^'S'^^'S^'S'S^' ( 3S I ) ^^ ^"^^^ sang-tO'cKi,
As you, Sir, give the order, I must sell it you for that.
Z^O^ ^2T|' ( ^2^^' ) 1 1 lu-sKo-kyi Jca-nang-nga yin-tsang
t'alc-lca-rang fhii-go.
i Hon. of ^^'
S |}x,'q =z to raise.
^ Note that '^' is used instead of '^°^^' So also 5Ji^'i|Cv' = one sang.
For three and more than three the ordinary numerals are used.
* 8j«l'ci' ( Q.^'Ji'q- ) = lit. to offer ; therefore to give or sell to a
superior.
198 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
23. Buying silk.
By a gentleman of the middle class (6th or 7th grade).
Gr. = Gentleman. S. = Shopkeeper.
G. {Coming to the door of the shop.) Is the merchant in ?
(2BC;'«faj-qq|^'q®q|^'5j2;;^'q^ j tshong-fon-U sliu
yo-pe ?
8. Yes, Sir. Please come in. qsTj^'Sf^s | ^-qj^^-y^J^-
^(5^'5'^<5^C;"^271' {^^T^')] ^^ yo ; ku-sKo ya chhip-
gyu nang-go.
S. (After G. has come in.) Please sit down. ^9^^'^^<'\'
Q^^qj-^Sy ( ^^' ) I sKu-denja-go.
G. Thank you. Have you got any silk of the best quality
for making a dress? OJ^^'lj | ^^'^C^'O^'g'q'^a^y^^'
5]^'<i(3j'I^|r§i'^C;'Hfy:js^'q'cr|<3jC;'C:^ | hs, khye-rang-la
chhu-pa so-ya Jco-chhen ang-gi tang-po yo-pa nang-nge.
8. Of what colour do you require it, Sir ? a.|2T|^'(S^'^^crj'
tshon-do Jcan-dre go-iva nang-gi y'6 fang.
G. Have you any dark yellow ? ^cn4j'l^' ( ^^' ) ^^^'
q](3JC^'C^^ I nyuJc-se yo-pa nang-nge ?
8. [Showing some.) Will this suit you, Sir ? f^Cfll^^l'Q^^-
^^^'^' ( ^' ) ^^^'^'^N'^^ I ^^ '^** driTi-lca nang-gi
a-yo ?
CHAPTER XVI. 199
Buying silk — continued,
G. = Gentleman. S. := Shopkeeper.
G. That will do. What is the price? s^^|'CT|^'3Cfc;'C;- 1'
wqj^-qjC'^l'^'y^a^'q'^a^CT | talc-lce yong-nga ; ja-
Icong Jca-tsho yim-fa nang-nga.
S. The price, Sir, is four ngii-sang (six rupees, ten annas,
eight pies). ai27|^'?jc;'2N^q'5JC:'q^"J}(3i | U Jcong
ngii-sang sKi-yin.
G. Tell me the real price. y^C^'CsCn-qii^C;- 1 yang-tiH sung.
S. How much will you give. Sir ? ^'^OT^'5^'f ^^'^'
^'cB^'^^'^'^^'=^<3jC;*ys^C:'C:' | hu-sKo-hji ja-lcong Ica-
tsh'6 so-re nang-yony-nga ?
G. Grive it me for two sang (three rupees, five annas, four
pies). ^C^'^'^<3iC^' ! sang-fo nang.
S. I cannot give it you for that. Please give me two sang
and five sh'o (four rupees, two annas, eight pies).
cn(3;c;*^27|^-q|3:[;' I t'e-la toU-tsa hii nil-pa min-du ; sang-
fo sKo-nga sb-re nang-ro-nang.
G. Very well, then, that price will suit. P^^Tj^'^ ] ^'<^'^^'
2TI^'y\!C^'CZ' I les, o-na tak-lce yong-nga,
S. In future whatever you require. Sir, is here. ^^^'^^'58'
i ^cc = will do. So also when a servant is filling a glass, cup, etc.,
^•^Sjc'i:^' I means that will do = has in Hindustani.
200 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Buying silk — continued.
G.= Gentleman. S. = Shopkeeper.
(Q.^'^'\ ^S 1 ^^'^^'^^ ku'slho-la thung-kho Ha-re yo-pa
nang-nga de yd.
G. Thank you. If I require anything, I will get it here.
qCT^'U I ^3]^'^'3C:'(3;'aia:'^'c^oj ] les, go-wa cKnng-
na len-Jcyi-yin.
8. Thank you, Sir. aj'a^qji^'U | Id les.
G. Good-day. f^'^J'^SZTI^'l?^ | o-na sKu-a.
8. Thank you, Good-day, Sir. q'qq|^-|| | 2T]'q'a^§q'g'
^|3jC^' II la les, Jca-le chhip-gyu-nang.
CHAPTER XVI. 201
24. A small trader calls at a gentleman's house with some
wares.
M. = Master. T. = Trader. S. = Servant.
T. to 8. Please ask if I may see the master. C ^' ^R^ <^'
q^j^^'^qi'm'^'S^cn^'rn^jC^' I nga kun-diln-la cha chholc-
lea sKu-ro-nang.
S. to T. Very good. O^^]^'!] | les.
8. to M. A trader wants to know if he may see you, Sir.
^C-q'ScTj-^'^s^aj-q-q^^ 'S^'^'g'^'^^^I t^hong-pa
chi kun-diin-la cha-chholc-lca sKu-M-du.
M. to 8. Very well, let him come in. !gc;'| ^'|^' (3^' )]
wong sho cKi.
8. to T, The merchant may come in. ^'^qa^'^'^^-^'^^'^q*
cS^'^ I Ishong-pon kun-diin-la fhe-chhoH-lca.
{Then the trader comes in before the master of the house,
takes off his hat, bows, and puts out his tongue according to
the regular salutation.)
M. to T. The merchant has arrived. Sit down* U^ ] cBC^
cq(5v'q^Tq^'qC;' | SI^ | ya tshong-pdn le-cKung ; do.
T. to M. Thank you. Sir. aj'qq|^-|j | la les.
M' to 8. Pour out some tea for the merchant. ($C^'^q(3;'GJ'R
sen I tshong-pon la cKa lu.
202 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
A small trader calls at a gentleman^ s house — continued.
M. = Master. T. = Trader. S. = Servant.
M. to T, What have you got for sale ? ^C:'^'^'^'^I5^'^^ |
tshong-gyu lea- re khe y'6 ?
T. to M. I have brought some turquoises to show you. 3nJ^]CI^'
^^'S'^'^^'^'^'^E^'^^ I gn-yii chem-yhe sKu- gyu
khe yd.
M. to T. (picking wp a turquoise.) What is the price of this
one? 5^2^^' (Q^^'f^') Sp'^^'^'^Sj-q] de Hong U-
tsh'd yim-pa ?
T. to M. Sir^ the price of this one is three sang (five rupees).
^^^1 5^^^'(f^^'f^')3f'^r^^I^'^<3j| Id, delcong
sang -sum yin.
M. to T. Tell the real price, ysJC^2T|'a^i^ | yang-ti lap.
T. to M. How much will Your Honour give ? ^'^(fi^^'^^'
^'(5i^'^2^f^'^^'^5;c;'y^C;'C I ku-sKo-kyi Ica-tshb so-re
nang yong-nga ?
M. to T. Make it one sang and five sh'o (two rupees, eight
annas). 5I^'^^'(?i'r^'9^' ( 9^' ) I ^(^'^^9-^a,'^i'9 ^^o-nga
cHi.
T. to M. Please give me two sang (three rupees, five annas,
four pies). 5JC''^2T|^a]'^^-q|3jC:'X=r|^'^ajC;' ] sang-
fo so-re nang-ronang.
M. to T. Very well, I will. (^(3j'2Cjc;'C' | ona yong-nga.
CHAPTER XVf. 20-S
A small trader calls at a gentleman's house — continued.
M. = Master. T. = Trader. S. = Servant.
M. to T. Now-a-days is the business of you traders fairly
good ? ^•?"c:'^c:'l3^'^c;'q'^q'^c;-i5^^^-(a^^2^-2T|^ I
t'e-ring'sa7ig khye tshong-pa-tsho-latshong au-tse duk-lce?
T. to M. Yes, fairly good, al^|^ | ^vqjC^'X^'f^^s^^l | Id, ga-ro-
du.
M. to T. In future if I want anything, I will send ward to
you to bring it. ^(5\^'(^'^pg^'^'^'2T«^'^'Q^||^'-^^^
i'a^(3:'qcc:- (2^"^') §]'y^<3;| sKn-la Iho-cUe la-re y'6-
'pa khe-sho se len tang-gi-yin.
T. to M. Thank you, Sir. a|:qq|2^'l5 | la les.
M. to T. Take tea, don't be in a hurry. l^^rf^^'F^^^C:' | qq'
q'3^'5S I ^"^^ cKa.-thung, tr el-la ma-cKe.
T. to M. Thank you, Sir, I won't have any more (tea).
f^^^'^^^'t^ I ®'^'^<3; I Id thu-chhe, sKu-Jci-men,
M. to T. Have another cup. ^ICQ^^C^' I kang thu7ig.
T.^oM. No more, thank you, Sir. a]2=I]^'i|(3; | cq^]^'^(9:| Id-
men, Id-men.
M. to T. Very well. Q'(3k'ysJCC^' [] o-na yong-nga.
(Then the trader makes the same salutation as at entering
and goes out.)
204 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
25. Deciding a dispute.
Which is the complainant ? ^^j'Q'S'^p,^:'^'^^ [ nyen-sKu
sKu-khen su re.
Which is the accused ? p'^cn'^'^r i khap-the su re.
Put the witnesses outside. I will call them in presently
one by one. ::^qc:'q^|'5rq|^-ai'^:^-|^-( |:^ ^ | q|(S^cr|-
ai'^'^'3^'3j^'^2^'qs5C:'(2^yc:-)^'5j(3j| prmg-po chhi-
lo-la d'6-cKi ; sKu-la re-re cKe-ne Jce-tang-gi-yin.
What is your complaint ? R^'^'^'®'^'^^*^ ! ^'%^' Jca-re
sKu-gyu yo-pa ?
Yesterday evening a Tibetan named Wang-dii beat me in the
bazaar without any reason. S^^^'filSjt'jgi^'QJ* q^' q'
gK*! dang-gong throm-la po-pa wang-dii se-khen-Hyi
nga ton-ta tsa-ne me-pa dung cKung.
He would not (lit. would not know to) beat you without
some reason. What actually happened ? (Lit. What
is it?) f'^'^^^-^^'^'^i^-^^-^^T-^c-^^-^-a^j-^^I ^-cr]-
^'^^ I ^^y^ ton-fa tsa-ne me-pa dung shing-gi ma-re.
t'e Ica-re re ?
He was coming drunk down (the hill), and I was going up.
^ ^^'^'»1'^'^^'*^«^*'l' is an adverb and as usual takes the adjectival
form.
CHAPTER XVI. 205
When he reached me he assaulted me. p^^'q^' x;i^'
^^'^Q'^;a,Y\\ ^•^^'Sg'^'^^I cS^-^-q-qSq^-
^'^C^'C^'^5 C^^'3^' I ^*^^^ ra-H-ne ma yong-gi du, nga ya
dro-lii yd, nge tsa-la lep-pa tang nya dung cKung.
{To the accused.) Why did you beat him ? (Lit. What is the
meaniug of beating by you ? ^.'"^^'^^'^^'S^'^^'
^'^'^^ [ khyo-re dung-we fon-t'a Ha-re re ?
Yesterday I drank a little beer ^ at a friend's house, and con-
sequently I have no idea what I did. p^' ^' q' 5^'
^^^'^^'^ ^^^ Z'^ ' ^^J^ ^'^^ a^^Zj^'z:
khe-sa nga-re ga-po nye-po chilc-Jci tsa-la^chhang toU-
tsa-chi thung-nga yim-pe ka-re cKe yd tsa-ne sKu-gyu
min-du.
You must pay a fine of five rupees ; in default {lit. if that does
not happen) I shall send you to jail for a week. ^^*
^§^' ( ^^^' ) ^'^"^ II gor-mo nga nye-pa drup te
ma cKung na diin-thra chi tsdn-ld chuH-Hi-yin.
1 Beer is brewed from barley in Tibet, and from marwa (eleusine
coracana) in Darjeeling and Sikkim.
* 1^' here means because.
3 ^^'^' means lit. to accomplish, and is used sometimes in the sense
of to give, to procure.
206 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
26. Paying a visit.
V. = Visitor. H. = Host.
F. How do you do ? ^'^^^'^l^CT]^- ^^^' (^^^' ^^' q ']
ku-sKo sKu-denja yo-pa ?
H. Very well. Please come in and sit down. OJ^li^'LVJ^ ]
U^^-Q^^^'g-^^C:' I q^^^'^^^j-O^Eqi I Id yd, ya
rhhip-gyu-nang, sKa-denja.
H. {to servant) Give this gentleman some tea. ^'^(5\^^'f^'
2T|^(1J '^'(oj^ I ku-sKo la so-ja shil.
NO
E. {to visitor) I never meet you now-a-days. i^^'O^^' ^^'nl'
qi(Sqi^*^*(3J^' 5;]^aj'^'qC^' | par-lam-chi kii-sKo ma-ne
je-ma-cKung.
V. That is so. I have been a bit worried by some work
lately J and so have been unable to call on you. ^TIQ'
q5^':^'3^*5j^'5^'qC I ka-nang-rang, par-lam-chi t'rel-
yeng dra-po chiJc-Jci char-yyu ma-ne ma-cKung.
1 Lit. — Are you seated, Sir ?
^ Lit.—Ye^.
S qx,-Qj5^'^fi|- a hterary word. The ordinary colloquial word would be
^•^C'^c.' In conversation between gentlemen a good many literary
words are used.
4 Or ?''5|'r
I gq-q* = business, 'ij^c.-q- (literary word) = to agitate.
CHAPTER XVI. 207
Paying a visit — continued.
V. = Visitor. H. = Host.
H. You have now come from your house I suppose. ^^'
sim-sha ne chhip-gyu nang-nga yin dro,
V. Yes, after finishing my committee work I have come
straight here. a^q|^-y^<3j | 'g(3j'g^''^ai'5j^-a^^';^C;-
^^^' ( Q^^'^- ) qS^'-^' ( q* ) ^<3i 1 let yin hlen-gye
tVo-ne lam-sang de cha-ra-yin,
JB". Well, stay here to-day and take it easy. ^'<^'S' ^^* nl'
0-na t'e-ring hu hlo-hlo nang-ne sHu-den-ja go.
V. Many thanks. a|'aj2T|^'l5 || Id les.
i ^^'JN'^'H^'?^' = a place where officials attend for work = cut-
chery, committee-room, etc.
208 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
27. The same continued.
V. Now the night is far advanced ; I must be going.
ta t'o-gong chhi-po cKi-kyi-du ; gong-pa sKu-go.
H. Yevj well., you must come and see me sometimes, when
free from work. Ol'aiSI]^'!} ] gj^^'^C^'gcTj^'^C:^-
f3^'^f^(5)^'j^'^<^C;'^CTl' ( ^^^' ) I la> les, thnlc-sang thuJc-
sang Id chhip-gyu nang-go.
V. Many thanks. You too must come and see me when you
are not busy. q-Ol^j^'ll ] ^'^TI^^'CMC'^CTj^-gai-'
Id les^ ku-sKo yang thu-fre me-pe gang~la nye tsa-la
chhip-gyu nang-go.
H. Well, Good-bye. s^' d]' q* O^^q' ^ ci|3jC;- ^^ ( c^qpj' ) j
ia Ha-le chhip-gyu nang-go.
V. Good-bye. a|'qcr|^'li^ I q]-q'q(S|cr|^'q|2^^-Q^^rT| | Id les,
Ica-le sKu-den-ja.
^ Lit. I must ask for leave.
1 ^cq^-^c^'^^il^'^c^-Qj- Hon. ior 9^^^^'^^^^'
3 Hon. for g'JI-q-
4 (jj-ajzq^-^ I ]S[ote the different senses in which this very frequent
expression is used, e.g., " Thank you," " Yes," " Very well," etc. Here
no translation is necessary.
CHAPTER XVI. 209
28. Receiving a visit from a Tibetan Official. {Conversation
about Tibet.)
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
T. How do you do ? ^ z^^^' ^(S^^^^* ^\K&^' C\E,^V Sk' q !
ffu-sKo sKu-clen-ja y'6-ya ?
E. Very well. Welcome. aj^j^'E^^;^ | g^'^^^'^^vC;'^^' |
Id yd, chha-phe nang-cliung.
T. {Polite reply.) OJ^^-Kf^T J Id yd.
£". Please sit down. ^ '^^^•q(^2^^'2^^c3j'C;^Rq| | ku-slio
sKu-den-ja.
T. Thank you. q'a|q^^-|5 1 U les.
E. {to his servant.) Offer the gentleman some tea.
^'2:r|^^'a|'eT|?Jq'5-®^| ku-sKo-la so-ja sKil.
E. In what part of Tibet do you live ? ^'^^^'^'0^'
q(^^^'cr]^6j'Q^Rq|'2^'q]'q'^^ I ku-sKo pd-la sKu-den
ja-sa Jca-pa re.
T. I live in Lhasa. cS^'^'g'^'G^'C^ai | nga do-sa hla-sa
la yin.
E. What Government post do you hold ? ^'^^^ '^9^'
q]'gq|-a|^'q|'5;-CT|<5jr-q^'cXf:^-q | ku-slio sHung-gi chha-
le Ica-re nan-gi yo-ya ?
T. I am a Tsi-pon {i.e., in charge of an accounts office).
14
210 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Receiving a visit from a Tibetan Official — continued.
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
C^'t^'^^'S'^^'^'S^'^'^^I ''^9^ tsi-pon-lcyi le-
Jca cKi-Jcyi-yo.
E. What work do you have to do as a Tsi-pon ? S'^(5i^^'
t^' 2^q^'3' S^' f^^' 2^'^' ^3jC;' S^3]^^'^5^ I hu-slio
tsi-pon-Jcyi chha-le Ha-re nang-go-re.
T. We have a lot of work to do in connection with the ac-
counts of the Government revenues and the like.
qr'irqi^y'm'c^ ] Id ngan-ts-ho sKung-gi hap-kyi tsi-le
la-so'k-pa mang-po clie go-kyi-yo.
E. Now-a-days who exercises supreme power m Tibet ?
^•S;c;'^|C:'q'^-^'jq'q^§^'^5^C§]'^^'q^ | te-ring-
sang -po-kyi gye-po su nang-gi yo-ica-re ?
T. The Dalai Lama has taken up the secular and spiritual
Government, and exercises the supreme power.
gq^' sq^f^' ^aj-'q-^'^j^' JOJ- ^:^- ^' ^:^' q^^' ^^'
gq^'^3]3^'S;(3^-q^^'§j^'CT](3irc:' (q') ^.^j kyam-
gon Rim-po-chhe-ki gye-si chho-si sKe-ne kyam-g'dn
Rim-po-chhe-ki nang-nga-re.
E. I see. Is Tibet a very large country ? q-qq^^'^ j q^'
(^C'^'q'^Sj'q^yTCC:^ 1 Id les, po lung-pa gya-chhem-
po yong~nge.
CHAPTER XVI. 211
Receiving a visit from a Tibetan Official— continued.
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
T. It is of middling size. OJ^j^'I^Q, '^•Q^^'Hf cJijs:^ | Id au-
tse clra-fo yd.
E. Which is the pleasantest part of Tibet ? ^'^'^^f^'^^J^'
STI'CJ'^r^'ysJC^' I 'po kyi kyil ne Ha-fa trowa-yong ?
T. Lhasa is about the pleasantest. ^^''^'g'^'f-TO'y^^' |
toU-tsa hl^sa tro-iva yong.
E. I see. Tibet must be, I fancy, a nice country.
Id les, cKe-na vo te yalc-po yo-pa yim-pa-rp.
T. Now I must be going for to-day. 2r'r'^C^'rqic;^-q'«'
^*^(5J ] fa t'e-ring gong -pa sKu-M-yin.
E. Won't you stay a little longer ? "^'^'qQ^j^'^l^aj'Q^^^l'
2vCn^ I toU-tsa sKu-denja-go.
T. To-day I have some work to do, so I must be going. I will
call on you later on. ^^'^C^'Cg'^^'^'C^qi'^'UsI^'^ZTIC;^*
q-®'5|'y^(3j I 2T]®^'a|'q^^'^'C^(3j | fe-ring nga trel-la
toU-tsa yd gong-fa sKii-M-yin ; sKu-la char-Jcyi-yin.
E. Very good. You must come and see me when you are
not busy. q'a^q|^-|]| ^=T|^-gai*^^-qS^'|^c:' 0^' ulQ^'
^ He means that it is very large, bub it is not considered etiquette
among Tibetan gentlemen to praise one's own possessions, not even
one's own country.
212 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
Receiving a visit from a Tibetan Official — continued.
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
g'W^^^ g*^<5JC;'s^5]^ I Id les, thuH-t'rel me-iDC gang
let nge tsa-la chhip-gyu nang-go.
T. Many thanks. Well, good-bye. ai'a|q|^'l5 1 Q^' ^ ^]^' S^'
q^^\^'^V\5^'0.E,'^ I h^ les, o-na Ka-le sKti-den-ja.
E. -Good-bye, then. q'qZT]^'|j | 2^'55'Q^^^'g'^<3^C:' j] ?«-
les, Jca-le chhip-gyn nang.
CHAPTER XVI. 218
29. The satne continued {discussing travelling arrangements).
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
E. According to Tibetan custom when a gentleman goes on
a journey does he give all his servants ponies to ride ?
jpb-kyi luTi-so la 'pom-jpo chho-yhe nang-nge gang-Id
sKajp-chhi gang-kha Id chhilc-jJ'i nang-yong nge ?
T. Yes, he provides them all with ponies. O^^l^'^C^'P'O^'e'
^Ic^C^^C^' I Id gang-kha la ta nang-yong.
E. After what manner do they proceed on their journey 't
-^3 SO
2TI(3iC'y\TC^' I chhip-gyu nang-if^e gang-Id Tian-dre-ie
chhip-gyu nang-yong ?
T. He puts half in front of him and half behind him, and
rides himself in the middle. (Sjq^' q* ^K " T] '^3^ ' (!]'
( c^^q ) qj^jC ^^* s^qa^-Hf ^-s^^q- as^o^q- ^^^-
UsJC^' I sKap-chhi chhe-ka ngen-la tong-nga nang-yong ;
chhe-ka sUuk-la shoH-lia-nang-ne fdm-yo kyil-la chhijp-
gyu nang-yong.
E, I understand. Do all the servants travel with their
214 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
The same continued {discussing travelling arrange-
ments)— continued.
T. = Tibetan. E.=: Englishman.
master? q-ajq]^-||| ^qS^-'Hf^r ^^' ^^- (Sjq^' §•
^Cp'SiJ^'y^C^'C^' I Id les ; 'pom-po fang hlen-gye
sKap-chhi gang-Jiha phe yong-nga ?
T. He sends his butler and cook on ahead ; then after his
muleteers have started, he starts himself with his
servants in single file. (^^^ ' ^9^' ^ ' ^C ' 3^ ' cB<3j *
2T]3JC^'yvIC^' I Id nyer-pa fang ma-chhen nyi nyen-dro Id
tong-nga nang-ne te-z-sliulc'la t're-pa chhin tshar-ra
fang fe-cHing sKap-chhi gang-hha pom-po fang hlen-
gye chhijp-ra dri/c-ne chhip-gyu 7iang-yong.
E. To do what does he send the butler and cook on ahead t
^^^'^'^'^''^s^^^''^5^^'^'K'^^ ( q- )
cn(5jC^'Q' ( q' ) ^^ I nyer-pa fang ma-chhen nyi ngen-
la Ica-re cKe-la tong-nga nang-nga-re.
T. He sends the two servants in advance in order to have
things ready and prepare food before he arrives-
CHAPTER XVI. 215
The same continued {discussing travelling arrange-
ments) . — continued.
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
/ ^' \ ^s: I ngen-dro nyi-fo 'pom-po chhip-gyu ma
nang Hong-ld fhejp-dr'ilz sKu-wa t'ang sKe-la so-wa
tong-ivga nang-nga re,
E. I understand. iS:' J f^'f^^^'^ || wong, Id les.
216 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
30. The same continued (discussing the agricultural and
mineral products of Tibet).
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
E. What crops are grown in Tibet ? f3qcT|25s]'q^'q'^'*^'qi-
^'^'C\T[^' I Id po-lci ton-tho T^a-re kye-yong ?
T. In Tibet itself, wheat, barley, peas and mustard are the
chief crops. In Kong-po maize, buck- wheat and vari-
ous other crops grow. Kong-po is warmer than
Lhasa. Besides bamboos, apricots, apples, walnuts,
and all kinds of food are grown. Cl|cn^' I^^'^C^'(l|*rn'
i3j^-5j3j- (tren) ^\^^' z^Q' q- ^\z: ^^' ^' q' I' Sfc- 1
rang-ld t'ro ne tren sum fang pe-lcang shiilc-chhe-iva
kye-yong ; kong-po Id ken-dzom tang t'rau la-soTi-pa
ton-tho na-tsho kye-yong ; hla-sa le kong-po fro-lci-re ;
nyung-ma tang kham-pio ku-shu tar-ka se Jcang-yang
kye-yong.
E. I see. How many days' journey is it from Lhasa to
Kong-po ? q'qq|^-|} | ^•^•3j^'^'"Hfq^' f^'(^^' ' 5^'
2n'c6^'3'^'^^ I ^^ ^^^^ hla-sa ne kong-po pa-la shalc-
ma Jca-tsho-kyi sa re ?
1 (S^m'W is often used colloquially for !^'f\'^'
CHAPTER XVI ;' 217
The same continued {discussing the agricultural and mineral
^products of 2^66^ — continued.
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
T. One reaches Upper Kong-po in fifteen days. To Lower
Kong-po the joiiruey takes one month. Q^^l^'TI^'
^S^'^^'^^'^^^'H]'"^^ ! Id Iwng-to Id sKaJc-ma ch'6-
nga la jphe-kyi-re ; kong-me far-tu da-ica chi tsani phe
go-hyi-re.
E, Is wood plentiful in Tibet ? qsT-q'^C^^^f^' 2f L^C;' C;^'
QJ^]^ I 'po-lci shing he-fo yong-nge-ld ?
T. There is a certain amount of wood ; but for fires cattle-
dung is mostly used. O^CTj^r Sc;'"^' ^' E^^ *^'*A=^^ *
^•^•^'=^y^'y^'f^'|^^' (I'q-) a^w (Q^g-) ^c;-]
Id shing toli-tsa yong-te shufc-chhe-ica me tong-ya Id
cho-ica bib yong.
E. Are gold, silver and coal to be had in Tibet by mining ?
C^s^ia^sJ I jpo-ld ser tang ngil do-so sa-ne don-gyu yong-
nge Id f
T. Yea, in Tibet itself gold, silver and coal are to be had by
1 Note method of describing the upper and lower parts of a country.
It is often used.
^ f^^^' In conversation between ordinary people ^^^' is used, but
the higher classes affect literary forms in their conversation.
218 TI^>yf.AN GRAMMAR.
The same continued (discussing the agricultural and mineral
products of Tibet) — continued.
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
mining, but it is not customary to mine for them.
(\^o:^(^'P^^\^'^0^''^'l^Z!'\ 1<J^ fo rang-ld ser tang
ngii do-so don-gyu yong-te don-pe luU-so mi-yong.
E. Is that so ? What harm is tkere in mining ? aj'fa^zin:^^'^ I
Q^'^'q'iT|(3^C:'C;-(:q-S5j*2T|'^-^^'q'^s^ | la-les ; d'6n-fa-
nang-nga la kyon Ha-re yo-iva-re.
T. If they are mined the soil-essence of the country is
damaged, and good crops are not produced. Gjcn^'
^'3'^'^S 11 ^''^ ' t'6n-na lung-'pe sa-chii nyam-hyi^re ;
t'6n-tho yang yaJc-fo kye-kyi ma-re,
^ A prevalent Tibetan idea.
CHAPTER XVI. 219'
31. A visit to the Dalai Lama hy a Tibetan General (De-pdn).
T. = Tibetan. E. = Englishman.
E. In Tibet when a general goes to pay his respects to the
Dalai Lama, what does he have to do ? q^'fl^'^i^i^"
^(3iC^'^cr|^'|T]'^^*a^2^^ I pd-la kyain-yon Rim-po-chhe
kum-dun-la Be-pon ku-sKo chi je-Jca char-ra nang~7ia
Han-dre nang go-Jcyi-re la.
T. After sitting for a while in the ante-room, the chief dro-
nyer ^ says to him, " You can come." After going
up, he must make three obeisances^; offer the Dalai
Lama a ceremonial scarf, take off his hat, and ask for
a blessing. q||^- ^q- Q^^]p\' O^f^' ^' R^^^ ' ^^3;^'
1 An official of the fourth grade. Under him in the Dalai Lama's
household are eight dro-nyers, who are fifth grade. All nine are
monks. Besides these there are four dro-nyers, one for each Shap-pe,
these dro-nyers being laymen and of sixth grade.
* Knees and forehead tou(;h the ground at each obeisance.
220 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
A visit to the Dalai Lama by a Tibetan General
{De-poji) — continued.
^^C^'®'i^'cn(5[C^'2:cn^'T]'^^ | sim-chhung gal'Ia tolc-tsa
sKu-den ja-ne te-ne dron-nyer chhem-po chhip-gyu-
nang chhoJc-Ica ha-oiang-yong ; yar-phep-pa fang Jcu-
chha sum tshe-ra nang-ne kyam-g'on Rim-po-chhe la
je-dar bii-ra-nang ne wu-sKa pi-ne chhalc-wang sKu-wa
nang go-liyi-re.
Then a silk cushion is placed below the throne. The De-
pon having sat down on it, tea is brought. ^'<3i^'
^x^x^' (q-) s^c:-2^¥^'^'a^S^'g'=T]ajc:'^c:''| te-ne
sKulc-thri sham t'e sKuli-den Jid-kha chi kyon-yong : t'e 'I
gang Id De-pon ku-sTio sKuJc-den ja tshar-ra~t'ang, so-
cKa chhip-gyu nang-yong.
After tea has been offered to the Dalai Lama, some is laid
before the De-pon. Q^^' 5^5j^'^^'^^'f^' ^^T^' S'
cn^f2^'^'(e5'q'^l(3;CysJC [ Kyam-gon Rim-po-chhe Id so-
cHa kya t'rup-pa tang De-pon ku-sKo Id so-cKa sKu-wa
nang-yong.
^ Note the hon. given to the verb by which the tea of the Dalai
Lama is brought in. It is not used in similar cases for officials even
■of bigh rank.
CHAPTER XVI. 221
A visit to the Dalai Lama hy a Tibetan General
[De-jpon) — continued.
Aftei' that rice-pudding is brought. ^d ' ^Q^] ' 0] ' ^(e(^'
^3^'^3^''?I^'^^S^'^'^^C:'y^C;' I t'e-'i sKuJc-ld sKeii-
dre dre-si chhip-ijyu nang-yong.
Then after this has been offered to the Dalai Lama, and to
the De-pon, the Dalai Lama inquires after his health
saying '' Tsha-rong De-pon, are you in good health ? "
^^^'^^'^'^^^'^' §' ^' ^^^'^^' g^^' ^^' ^^'
t'e-ne Kyam-ydn Bulc Id hya t'rup-pa fang De-pon kii-
sKo la sKu-iva nang-ne Kyani-gon Bim-po-chhe-ne tsham-
t'ri nang-nga Id Tsha-rong De-pon suJc-po de-po cKung-
nge ka-nang-yong.
^ Made of rice, butter and sugar.
^ Lit. " Inner or real protector."
s Lit. '* Intermediate question," i.e., the first question of the new in-
terview sometime having elapsed since the last.
* The family name or surname of the De-pon, with estates in the
U province.
222 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
.32. Diplomatic intercourse, hon.
The Britisli Government is not responsible. ^3^' ^?t^' ^'
nqi^' raqi'y^C'^^'^'^ff I in-sKung-la thu-kha yo-wa
ma re.
It will be a source of friction. qmq|' 27|(e^a^' ff^5: U^Q'^\^^ |
thruJc-slii kyen yong-gi-re.
Our subjects will refuse to pay taxes or obey the laws.
am;^'^'C\Tr' | ngan-tsho mi-ser-Jcyi thre je thup mi-
yong ; thrim yany hhye-mi-yong.
It is probably not finally decided. q^' ^C:* C^' ^^' q' 0^5^ |
Be- rang nge me-pa dra.
It will be referred for equitable adjustment. ^S'^^'^^'
Qsrs^'CXjC^'C®'^*'^^ I Dra-trang-jpar-dum yong-nga
sKu-M-re.
The British Government desire to maintain amicable rela-
tions with other governments. ^5^'^^C^' ^^' ^^'
pq- ^](o^^' ^z: ^ ^5^' qg^- Sfc: • qS;- gq^^-o^"^:^- ^^^'^'
y^T^'CJ'-^^ I in-sK'ung-gi gye-khap sK en tang thiin-lam
yong-ii'je thnk-do nang-gi yo-iva-re.
They will make every endeavour to pick a quarrel with the
Tibetan Government, jq^'^f^'q^' ^\^Z:' Q\' ^s^' ^T'
J Lit. " will be unable," i.e. " will profess inability," " w4ll refuse."
CHAPTER XVI. 223
gf^'^^^'^C'l^'^'2^'^^' I khon-tsho f6-sKung~la
nye k'6~gyii thap Icang-thup cKe-yong.
Although China is divided into parties, she can raise soldiers
to meet aggression on her territory. :S'(3Jz^'(3jC'^^'P'
cXjC] gya-na nang-tsa kha-kha cKe de-na-yang, so-sij
sa-cha sung-yyu muk-mi ku-thup-yong .
It will be difficult for us to hold out much longer, for you
know how much more powerful the oue nation is than
the other (lit. the great difference in the extent of
the power of the two nations). ^zm^^* g;jC^cn^' ^rr*
^''^S I gong-ngak nang-sKin gye-khajp nyi-po top
chhe-chhung he-hak chhein-po shor-iva yin-tsang ngan-
tsho gyiin-ring kak thiip-'pa ka-le-clihem-iio yong-gi-re.
I fear that serious complications may arise, for the majority
of the people are already beginning to complain of
the situation. ^- 2<ja|'^5;- q^' T|' Q^^O^' qT'^' q'*^^'
^(^j'q'-^^r I r)ii phe-chhe le-ka di-'l so-la te-ne t'an-da-
ne ke-sho kyi-du ; ge-kyon kang-men yong-nyen chhem-
po-re.
I shall be held responsible if the negotiations fail. *1^^'
224 TIBETAN GRAMMAR.
qi'^C I ka-mon ton-min ma-mung-na ma-cKung ma-
thu-joe kha nga-la yong-gi-re.
Oar government has no aim other than the maintenance of
the status quo. C^'cB S^'^^C:'§]*^=T]^'(^"^^'f^' ^^'§^'
^'ysj^*^'^'^^ T ngan-tsho sKung-yi thung-do'la
chhap-si ngonijo rang -j a sKak-gyu ma-to sKen-lcyi
gong-ya yo-wa Qna-re.
J-
CHAPTER XVII.
^((gniTuuuji
^
M ey «/^^ru M \ ojuy a^<(
iiugi
.^ 3. ^
i^
^ /5^ ^ Q> H nS
/^ C
uuip^x^^c|n
HOME USE
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
MAIN LIBRARY
This book is due on the last date stamped below.
1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405.
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books
to Circulation Desk.
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior
to due date.
ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS
AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT.
^MlS
^^^^"9^
S£t .. , is/^m. Auc-
REC. CIR. sfp 5 75
Bi
Bs im
^0. GIH. j^h, 1 4 '78
nm^
-i '-/ » ' *J 1 V I ^
laciR. DECS ^T^
LD21 — A-40m-i2,'74 General Library
(S2700L.) University of California
Berkeley
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES
CDM7DDfi3ED
r.V
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
josepn t». Ptffettierf
Berkeley, C4i if.
<^^-
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11